daa9c6f7ab82dbd146f1cb46a207c45316046587
[bpt/emacs.git] / doc / misc / cc-mode.texi
1 \input texinfo
2 @c Notes to self regarding line handling:
3 @c
4 @c Empty lines are often significant before @end directives; avoid them.
5 @c
6 @c Empty lines before and after @example directives are significant in
7 @c info output but not in TeX. Empty lines inside @example directives
8 @c are significant.
9
10 @c Conventions for formatting examples:
11 @c o If the example contains empty lines then put the surrounding empty
12 @c lines inside the @example directives. Put them outside otherwise.
13 @c o Use @group inside the example only if it shows indentation where
14 @c the relation between lines inside is relevant.
15 @c o Format line number columns like this:
16 @c 1: foo
17 @c 2: bar
18 @c ^ one space
19 @c ^^ two columns, right alignment
20 @c o Check line lengths in TeX output; they can typically be no longer
21 @c than 70 chars, 60 if the paragraph is indented.
22
23 @comment TBD: Document the finer details of statement anchoring?
24
25 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
26 @comment %**start of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region)
27 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
28
29
30 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
31 @comment How to make the various output formats:
32 @comment (Thanks to Robert Chassell for supplying this information.)
33 @comment Note that Texinfo 4.7 (or later) is needed.
34 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
35 @ignore
36 In each of the following pairs of commands, the first generates a
37 version with cross references pointing to the GNU Emacs manuals,
38 the second with them pointing to the XEmacs manuals.
39 ## Info output
40 makeinfo cc-mode.texi
41 makeinfo -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
42
43 ## DVI output
44 ## You may need to set up the environment variable TEXINPUTS so
45 ## that tex can find the file texinfo.tex - See the tex
46 ## manpage.
47 texi2dvi cc-mode.texi
48 texi2dvi -t "@set XEMACS " cc-mode.texi
49
50 ## HTML output. (The --no-split parameter is optional)
51 makeinfo --html --no-split cc-mode.texi
52 makeinfo --html --no-split -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
53
54 ## Plain text output
55 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
56 --no-headers --output=cc-mode.txt cc-mode.texi
57 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
58 --no-headers --output=cc-mode.txt -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
59
60 ## DocBook output
61 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
62 cc-mode.texi
63 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
64 -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
65
66 ## XML output
67 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
68 cc-mode.texi
69 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
70 -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
71
72 #### (You must be in the same directory as the viewed file.)
73
74 ## View DVI output
75 xdvi cc-mode.dvi &
76
77 ## View HTML output
78 mozilla cc-mode.html
79 @end ignore
80
81 @comment No overfull hbox marks in the dvi file.
82 @finalout
83
84 @setfilename ../../info/ccmode
85 @settitle CC Mode Manual
86 @footnotestyle end
87
88 @c The following four macros generate the filenames and titles of the
89 @c main (X)Emacs manual and the Elisp/Lispref manual. Leave the
90 @c Texinfo variable `XEMACS' unset to generate a GNU Emacs version, set it
91 @c to generate an XEmacs version, e.g., with
92 @c "makeinfo -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi".
93 @ifset XEMACS
94 @macro emacsman
95 xemacs
96 @end macro
97 @macro emacsmantitle
98 XEmacs User's Manual
99 @end macro
100 @macro lispref
101 lispref
102 @end macro
103 @macro lispreftitle
104 XEmacs Lisp Reference Manual
105 @end macro
106 @end ifset
107
108 @ifclear XEMACS
109 @macro emacsman
110 emacs
111 @end macro
112 @macro emacsmantitle
113 GNU Emacs Manual
114 @end macro
115 @macro lispref
116 elisp
117 @end macro
118 @macro lispreftitle
119 GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual
120 @end macro
121 @end ifclear
122
123
124 @macro ccmode
125 CC Mode
126 @end macro
127
128 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
129 @comment @setchapternewpage odd !! we don't want blank pages !!
130 @comment %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region)
131 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
132
133
134 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
135 @comment
136 @comment Texinfo manual for CC Mode
137 @comment Generated from the original README file by Krishna Padmasola
138 @comment <krishna@earth-gw.njit.edu>
139 @comment
140 @comment Authors:
141 @comment Barry A. Warsaw
142 @comment Martin Stjernholm
143 @comment Alan Mackenzie
144 @comment
145 @comment Maintained by Martin Stjernholm and Alan Mackenzie <bug-cc-mode@gnu.org>
146 @comment
147 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
148
149 @comment Define an index for syntactic symbols.
150 @defindex ss
151
152 @comment Combine key, syntactic symbol and concept indices into one.
153 @syncodeindex ss cp
154 @syncodeindex ky cp
155
156 @copying
157 This manual is for CC Mode in Emacs.
158
159 Copyright @copyright{} 1995--2012 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
160
161 @quotation
162 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
163 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
164 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
165 Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover texts being ``A GNU Manual'',
166 and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the license
167 is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
168
169 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have the freedom to copy and
170 modify this GNU manual.''
171 @end quotation
172 @end copying
173
174 @comment Info directory entry for use by install-info. The indentation
175 @comment here is by request from the FSF folks.
176 @dircategory Emacs editing modes
177 @direntry
178 * CC Mode: (ccmode). Emacs mode for editing C, C++, Objective-C,
179 Java, Pike, AWK, and CORBA IDL code.
180 @end direntry
181
182 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
183 @comment TeX title page
184 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
185
186 @titlepage
187 @sp 10
188
189 @center @titlefont{CC Mode 5.32}
190 @sp 2
191 @center @subtitlefont{A GNU Emacs mode for editing C and C-like languages}
192 @sp 2
193 @center Barry A. Warsaw, Martin Stjernholm, Alan Mackenzie
194
195 @page
196 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
197 @insertcopying
198
199 This manual was generated from cc-mode.texi, which is distributed with Emacs,
200 or can be downloaded from @url{http://savannah.gnu.org/projects/emacs/}.
201 @end titlepage
202
203 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
204 @comment The Top node contains the master menu for the Info file.
205 @comment This appears only in the Info file, not the printed manual.
206 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
207
208 @summarycontents
209 @contents
210
211 @node Top, Introduction, (dir), (dir)
212 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
213
214 @ifnottex
215 @top @ccmode{}
216
217 @ccmode{} is a GNU Emacs mode for editing files containing C, C++,
218 Objective-C, Java, CORBA IDL (and the variants PSDL and CIDL), Pike
219 and AWK code. It provides syntax-based indentation, font locking, and
220 has several handy commands and some minor modes to make the editing
221 easier. It does not provide tools to look up and navigate between
222 functions, classes, etc.; there are other packages for that.
223
224 @insertcopying
225 @end ifnottex
226
227 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
228 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
229
230 @menu
231 * Introduction::
232 * Overview::
233 * Getting Started::
234 * Commands::
235 * Font Locking::
236 * Config Basics::
237 * Custom Filling and Breaking::
238 * Custom Auto-newlines::
239 * Clean-ups::
240 * Indentation Engine Basics::
241 * Customizing Indentation::
242 * Custom Macros::
243 * Odds and Ends::
244 * Sample .emacs File::
245 * Performance Issues::
246 * Limitations and Known Bugs::
247 * FAQ::
248 * Updating CC Mode::
249 * Mailing Lists and Bug Reports::
250 * GNU Free Documentation License::
251 * Command and Function Index::
252 * Variable Index::
253 * Concept and Key Index::
254
255 @detailmenu
256 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
257
258 Commands
259
260 * Indentation Commands::
261 * Comment Commands::
262 * Movement Commands::
263 * Filling and Breaking::
264 * Minor Modes::
265 * Electric Keys::
266 * Auto-newlines::
267 * Hungry WS Deletion::
268 * Subword Movement::
269 * Other Commands::
270
271 Font Locking
272
273 * Font Locking Preliminaries::
274 * Faces::
275 * Doc Comments::
276 * AWK Mode Font Locking::
277
278 Configuration Basics
279
280 * CC Hooks::
281 * Style Variables::
282 * Styles::
283
284 Styles
285
286 * Built-in Styles::
287 * Choosing a Style::
288 * Adding Styles::
289 * Guessing the Style::
290 * File Styles::
291
292 Customizing Auto-newlines
293
294 * Hanging Braces::
295 * Hanging Colons::
296 * Hanging Semicolons and Commas::
297
298 Hanging Braces
299
300 * Custom Braces::
301
302 Indentation Engine Basics
303
304 * Syntactic Analysis::
305 * Syntactic Symbols::
306 * Indentation Calculation::
307
308 Syntactic Symbols
309
310 * Function Symbols::
311 * Class Symbols::
312 * Conditional Construct Symbols::
313 * Switch Statement Symbols::
314 * Brace List Symbols::
315 * External Scope Symbols::
316 * Paren List Symbols::
317 * Literal Symbols::
318 * Multiline Macro Symbols::
319 * Objective-C Method Symbols::
320 * Java Symbols::
321 * Statement Block Symbols::
322 * K&R Symbols::
323
324 Customizing Indentation
325
326 * c-offsets-alist::
327 * Interactive Customization::
328 * Line-Up Functions::
329 * Custom Line-Up::
330 * Other Indentation::
331
332 Line-Up Functions
333
334 * Brace/Paren Line-Up::
335 * List Line-Up::
336 * Operator Line-Up::
337 * Comment Line-Up::
338 * Misc Line-Up::
339
340 Customizing Macros
341
342 * Macro Backslashes::
343 * Macros with ;::
344
345 @end detailmenu
346 @end menu
347
348 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
349 @node Introduction, Overview, Top, Top
350 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
351 @chapter Introduction
352 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
353
354 @cindex BOCM
355 @cindex history
356 @cindex awk-mode.el
357 @cindex c-mode.el
358 @cindex c++-mode.el
359
360 Welcome to @ccmode{}, a GNU Emacs mode for editing files containing C,
361 C++, Objective-C, Java, CORBA IDL (and the variants CORBA PSDL and
362 CIDL), Pike and AWK code. This incarnation of the mode is descended
363 from @file{c-mode.el} (also called ``Boring Old C Mode'' or BOCM
364 @t{:-)}, @file{c++-mode.el} version 2, which Barry Warsaw had been
365 maintaining since 1992, and @file{awk-mode.el}, a long neglected mode
366 in the (X)Emacs base.
367
368 Late in 1997, Martin Stjernholm joined Barry on the @ccmode{}
369 Maintainers Team, and implemented the Pike support. In 2000 Martin
370 took over as the sole maintainer. In 2001 Alan Mackenzie joined the
371 team, implementing AWK support in version 5.30. @ccmode{} did not
372 originally contain the font lock support for its languages; that
373 was added in version 5.30.
374
375 This manual describes @ccmode{}
376 @comment The following line must appear on its own, so that the
377 version 5.32.
378 @comment Release.py script can update the version number automatically
379
380 @ccmode{} supports the editing of K&R and ANSI C, C++, Objective-C,
381 Java, CORBA's Interface Definition Language, Pike@footnote{A C-like
382 scripting language with its roots in the LPC language used in some MUD
383 engines. See @uref{http://pike.ida.liu.se/}.} and AWK files. In this
384 way, you can easily set up consistent font locking and coding styles for
385 use in editing all of these languages, although AWK is not yet as
386 uniformly integrated as the other languages.
387
388 @findex c-mode
389 @findex c++-mode
390 @findex objc-mode
391 @findex java-mode
392 @findex idl-mode
393 @findex pike-mode
394 @findex awk-mode
395 Note that the name of this package is ``@ccmode{}'', but there is no top
396 level @code{cc-mode} entry point. All of the variables, commands, and
397 functions in @ccmode{} are prefixed with @code{c-@var{thing}}, and
398 @code{c-mode}, @code{c++-mode}, @code{objc-mode}, @code{java-mode},
399 @code{idl-mode}, @code{pike-mode}, and @code{awk-mode} entry points are
400 provided. This package is intended to be a replacement for
401 @file{c-mode.el}, @file{c++-mode.el} and @file{awk-mode.el}.
402
403 A special word of thanks goes to Krishna Padmasola for his work in
404 converting the original @file{README} file to Texinfo format. I'd
405 also like to thank all the @ccmode{} victims who help enormously
406 during the early beta stages of @ccmode{}'s development.
407
408 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
409 @node Overview, Getting Started, Introduction, Top
410 @comment node-name, next, previous, up@cindex organization of the manual
411 @chapter Overview of the Manual
412 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
413
414 @noindent
415 The manual starts with several introductory chapters (including this
416 one).
417
418 @noindent
419 The next chunk of the manual describes the day to day @emph{use} of
420 @ccmode{} (as contrasted with how to customize it).
421
422 @itemize @bullet
423 @item
424 The chapter ``Commands'' describes in detail how to use (nearly) all
425 of @ccmode{}'s features. There are extensive cross-references from
426 here to the corresponding sections later in the manual which tell you
427 how to customize these features.
428
429 @item
430 ``Font Locking'' describes how ``syntax highlighting'' is applied to
431 your buffers. It is mainly background information and can be skipped
432 over at a first reading.
433 @end itemize
434
435 @noindent
436 The next chunk of the manual describes how to @emph{customize}
437 @ccmode{}. Typically, an overview of a topic is given at the chapter
438 level, then the sections and subsections describe the material in
439 increasing detail.
440
441 @itemize @bullet
442 @item
443 The chapter ``Configuration Basics'' tells you @emph{how} to write
444 customizations: whether in hooks, in styles, in both, or in neither,
445 depending on your needs. It describes the @ccmode{} style system and
446 lists the standard styles that @ccmode{} supplies.
447
448 @item
449 The next few chapters describe in detail how to customize the various
450 features of @ccmode{}.
451
452 @item
453 Finally, there is a sample @file{.emacs} fragment, which might help you
454 in creating your own customization.
455 @end itemize
456
457 @noindent
458 The manual ends with ``this and that'', things that don't fit cleanly
459 into any of the previous chunks.
460
461 @itemize @bullet
462 @item
463 Two chapters discuss the performance of @ccmode{} and known
464 bugs/limitations.
465
466 @item
467 The FAQ contains a list of common problems and questions.
468
469 @item
470 The next two chapters tell you how to get in touch with the @ccmode{}
471 project: whether for updating @ccmode{} or submitting bug reports.
472 @end itemize
473
474 @noindent
475 Finally, there are the customary indices.
476
477 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
478 @node Getting Started, Commands, Overview, Top
479 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
480 @chapter Getting Started
481 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
482
483 If you got this version of @ccmode{} with Emacs or XEmacs, it should
484 work just fine right out of the box. Note however that you might not
485 have the latest @ccmode{} release and might want to upgrade your copy
486 (see below).
487
488 You should probably start by skimming through the entire Commands chapter
489 (@pxref{Commands}) to get an overview of @ccmode{}'s capabilities.
490
491 After trying out some commands, you may dislike some aspects of
492 @ccmode{}'s default configuration. Here is an outline of how to
493 change some of the settings that newcomers to @ccmode{} most often
494 want to change:
495
496 @table @asis
497 @item c-basic-offset
498 This Lisp variable holds an integer, the number of columns @ccmode{}
499 indents nested code. To set this value to 6, customize
500 @code{c-basic-offset} or put this into your @file{.emacs}:
501
502 @example
503 (setq c-basic-offset 6)
504 @end example
505
506 @item The (indentation) style
507 The basic ``shape'' of indentation created by @ccmode{}---by default,
508 this is @code{gnu} style (except for Java and AWK buffers). A list of
509 the available styles and their descriptions can be found in
510 @ref{Built-in Styles}. A complete specification of the @ccmode{}
511 style system, including how to create your own style, can be found in
512 the chapter @ref{Styles}. To set your style to @code{linux}, either
513 customize @code{c-default-style} or put this into your @file{.emacs}:
514
515 @example
516 (setq c-default-style '((java-mode . "java")
517 (awk-mode . "awk")
518 (other . "linux")))
519 @end example
520
521 @item Electric Indentation
522 Normally, when you type ``punctuation'' characters such as @samp{;} or
523 @samp{@{}, @ccmode{} instantly reindents the current line. This can
524 be disconcerting until you get used to it. To disable @dfn{electric
525 indentation} in the current buffer, type @kbd{C-c C-l}. Type the same
526 thing to enable it again. To have electric indentation disabled by
527 default, put the following into your @file{.emacs} file@footnote{There
528 is no ``easy customization'' facility for making this change.}:
529
530 @example
531 (setq-default c-electric-flag nil)
532 @end example
533
534 @noindent
535 Details of this and other similar ``Minor Modes'' appear in the
536 section @ref{Minor Modes}.
537
538 @item Making the @key{RET} key indent the new line
539 The standard Emacs binding for @key{RET} just adds a new line. If you
540 want it to reindent the new line as well, rebind the key. Note that
541 the action of rebinding would fail if the pertinent keymap didn't yet
542 exist---we thus need to delay the action until after @ccmode{} has
543 been loaded. Put the following code into your @file{.emacs}:
544
545 @example
546 (defun my-make-CR-do-indent ()
547 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break))
548 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-make-CR-do-indent)
549 @end example
550
551 @noindent
552 This example demonstrates the use of a very powerful @ccmode{} (and
553 Emacs) facility, the hook. The use of @ccmode{}'s hooks is described
554 in @ref{CC Hooks}.
555 @end table
556
557 All these settings should occur in your @file{.emacs} @emph{before}
558 any @ccmode{} buffers get loaded---in particular, before any call of
559 @code{desktop-read}.
560
561 As you get to know the mode better, you may want to make more
562 ambitious changes to your configuration. For this, you should start
563 reading the chapter @ref{Config Basics}.
564
565 If you are upgrading an existing @ccmode{} installation, please see
566 the @file{README} file for installation details. In particular, if
567 you are going to be editing AWK files, @file{README} describes how to
568 configure your (X)Emacs so that @ccmode{} will supersede the obsolete
569 @code{awk-mode.el} which might have been supplied with your (X)Emacs.
570 @ccmode{} might not work with older versions of Emacs or XEmacs. See
571 the @ccmode{} release notes at @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net}
572 for the latest information on Emacs version and package compatibility
573 (@pxref{Updating CC Mode}).
574
575 @deffn Command c-version
576 @findex version (c-)
577 You can find out what version of @ccmode{} you are using by visiting a C
578 file and entering @kbd{M-x c-version RET}. You should see this message in
579 the echo area:
580
581 @example
582 Using CC Mode version 5.XX
583 @end example
584
585 @noindent
586 where @samp{XX} is the minor release number.
587 @end deffn
588
589 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
590 @node Commands, Font Locking, Getting Started, Top
591 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
592 @chapter Commands
593 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
594
595 This chapter specifies all of CC Mode's commands, and thus contains
596 nearly everything you need to know to @emph{use} @ccmode{} (as
597 contrasted with configuring it). @dfn{Commands} here means both
598 control key sequences and @dfn{electric keys}, these being characters
599 such as @samp{;} which, as well as inserting themselves into the
600 buffer, also do other things.
601
602 You might well want to review
603 @ifset XEMACS
604 @ref{Lists,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}},
605 @end ifset
606 @ifclear XEMACS
607 @ref{Moving by Parens,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}},
608 @end ifclear
609 which describes commands for moving around brace and parenthesis
610 structures.
611
612
613 @menu
614 * Indentation Commands::
615 * Comment Commands::
616 * Movement Commands::
617 * Filling and Breaking::
618 * Minor Modes::
619 * Electric Keys::
620 * Auto-newlines::
621 * Hungry WS Deletion::
622 * Subword Movement::
623 * Other Commands::
624 @end menu
625
626 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
627 @node Indentation Commands, Comment Commands, Commands, Commands
628 @comment node-name, next, previous,up
629 @section Indentation Commands
630 @cindex indentation
631 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
632
633 The following commands reindent C constructs. Note that when you
634 change your coding style, either interactively or through some other
635 means, your file does @emph{not} automatically get reindented. You
636 will need to execute one of the following commands to see the effects
637 of your changes.
638
639 @cindex GNU indent program
640 Also, variables like @code{c-hanging-*} and @code{c-cleanup-list}
641 (@pxref{Custom Auto-newlines}) only affect how on-the-fly code is
642 formatted. Changing the ``hanginess'' of a brace and then
643 reindenting, will not move the brace to a different line. For this,
644 you're better off getting an external program like GNU @code{indent},
645 which will rearrange brace location, amongst other things.
646
647 Preprocessor directives are handled as syntactic whitespace from other
648 code, i.e., they can be interspersed anywhere without affecting the
649 indentation of the surrounding code, just like comments.
650
651 The code inside macro definitions is, by default, still analyzed
652 syntactically so that you get relative indentation there just as you'd
653 get if the same code was outside a macro. However, since there is no
654 hint about the syntactic context, i.e., whether the macro expands to an
655 expression, to some statements, or perhaps to whole functions, the
656 syntactic recognition can be wrong. @ccmode{} manages to figure it
657 out correctly most of the time, though.
658
659 Some macros, when invoked, ''have their own semicolon''. To get the
660 next line indented correctly, rather than as a continuation line,
661 @xref{Macros with ;}.
662
663 Reindenting large sections of code can take a long time. When
664 @ccmode{} reindents a region of code, it is essentially equivalent to
665 hitting @key{TAB} on every line of the region.
666
667 These commands indent code:
668
669 @table @asis
670 @item @kbd{@key{TAB}} (@code{c-indent-command})
671 @kindex TAB
672 @findex c-indent-command
673 @findex indent-command (c-)
674 This command indents the current line. That is all you need to know
675 about it for normal use.
676
677 @code{c-indent-command} does different things, depending on the
678 setting of @code{c-syntactic-indentation} (@pxref{Indentation Engine
679 Basics}):
680
681 @itemize @bullet
682 @item
683 When it's non-@code{nil} (which it normally is), the command indents
684 the line according to its syntactic context. With a prefix argument
685 (@kbd{C-u @key{TAB}}), it will re-indent the entire
686 expression@footnote{this is only useful for a line starting with a
687 comment opener or an opening brace, parenthesis, or string quote.}
688 that begins at the line's left margin.
689
690 @item
691 When it's @code{nil}, the command indents the line by an extra
692 @code{c-basic-offset} columns. A prefix argument acts as a
693 multiplier. A bare prefix (@kbd{C-u @key{TAB}}) is equivalent to -1,
694 removing @code{c-basic-offset} columns from the indentation.
695 @end itemize
696
697 The precise behavior is modified by several variables: With
698 @code{c-tab-always-indent}, you can make @key{TAB} insert whitespace
699 in some circumstances---@code{c-insert-tab-function} then defines
700 precisely what sort of ``whitespace'' this will be. Set the standard
701 Emacs variable @code{indent-tabs-mode} to @code{t} if you want real
702 @samp{tab} characters to be used in the indentation, to @code{nil} if
703 you want only spaces. @xref{Just Spaces,,,@emacsman{},
704 @emacsmantitle{}}.
705
706 @defopt c-tab-always-indent
707 @vindex tab-always-indent (c-)
708 @cindex literal
709 This variable modifies how @key{TAB} operates.
710 @itemize @bullet
711 @item
712 When it is @code{t} (the default), @key{TAB} simply indents the
713 current line.
714 @item
715 When it is @code{nil}, @key{TAB} (re)indents the line only if point is
716 to the left of the first non-whitespace character on the line.
717 Otherwise it inserts some whitespace (a tab or an equivalent number of
718 spaces; see below) at point.
719 @item
720 With some other value, the line is reindented. Additionally, if point
721 is within a string or comment, some whitespace is inserted.
722 @end itemize
723 @end defopt
724
725 @defopt c-insert-tab-function
726 @vindex insert-tab-function (c-)
727 @findex tab-to-tab-stop
728 When ``some whitespace'' is inserted as described above, what actually
729 happens is that the function stored in @code{c-insert-tab-function} is
730 called. Normally, this is @code{insert-tab}, which inserts a real tab
731 character or the equivalent number of spaces (depending on
732 @code{indent-tabs-mode}). Some people, however, set
733 @code{c-insert-tab-function} to @code{tab-to-tab-stop} so as to get
734 hard tab stops when indenting.
735 @end defopt
736 @end table
737
738 @noindent
739 The kind of indentation the next five commands do depends on the
740 setting of @code{c-syntactic-indentation} (@pxref{Indentation Engine
741 Basics}):
742 @itemize @bullet
743 @item
744 when it is non-@code{nil} (the default), the commands indent lines
745 according to their syntactic context;
746 @item
747 when it is @code{nil}, they just indent each line the same amount as
748 the previous non-blank line. The commands that indent a region aren't
749 very useful in this case.
750 @end itemize
751
752 @table @asis
753 @item @kbd{C-j} (@code{newline-and-indent})
754 @kindex C-j
755 @findex newline-and-indent
756 Inserts a newline and indents the new blank line, ready to start
757 typing. This is a standard (X)Emacs command.
758
759 @item @kbd{C-M-q} (@code{c-indent-exp})
760 @kindex C-M-q
761 @findex c-indent-exp
762 @findex indent-exp (c-)
763 Indents an entire balanced brace or parenthesis expression. Note that
764 point must be on the opening brace or parenthesis of the expression
765 you want to indent.
766
767 @item @kbd{C-c C-q} (@code{c-indent-defun})
768 @kindex C-c C-q
769 @findex c-indent-defun
770 @findex indent-defun (c-)
771 Indents the entire top-level function, class or macro definition
772 encompassing point. It leaves point unchanged. This function can't be
773 used to reindent a nested brace construct, such as a nested class or
774 function, or a Java method. The top-level construct being reindented
775 must be complete, i.e., it must have both a beginning brace and an ending
776 brace.
777
778 @item @kbd{C-M-\} (@code{indent-region})
779 @kindex C-M-\
780 @findex indent-region
781 Indents an arbitrary region of code. This is a standard Emacs command,
782 tailored for C code in a @ccmode{} buffer. Note, of course, that point
783 and mark must delineate the region you want to indent.
784
785 @item @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{c-mark-function})
786 @kindex C-M-h
787 @findex c-mark-function
788 @findex mark-function (c-)
789 While not strictly an indentation command, this is useful for marking
790 the current top-level function or class definition as the current
791 region. As with @code{c-indent-defun}, this command operates on
792 top-level constructs, and can't be used to mark say, a Java method.
793 @end table
794
795 These variables are also useful when indenting code:
796
797 @defopt indent-tabs-mode
798 This is a standard Emacs variable that controls how line indentation
799 is composed. When it's non-@code{nil}, tabs can be used in a line's
800 indentation, otherwise only spaces are used.
801 @end defopt
802
803 @defopt c-progress-interval
804 @vindex progress-interval (c-)
805 When indenting large regions of code, this variable controls how often a
806 progress message is displayed. Set this variable to @code{nil} to
807 inhibit the progress messages, or set it to an integer which is how
808 often (in seconds) progress messages are to be displayed.
809 @end defopt
810
811 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
812 @node Comment Commands, Movement Commands, Indentation Commands, Commands
813 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
814 @section Comment Commands
815 @cindex comments (insertion of)
816 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
817
818 @table @asis
819 @item @kbd{C-c C-c} (@code{comment-region})
820 @kindex C-c C-c
821 @findex comment-region
822 This command comments out the lines that start in the region. With a
823 negative argument, it does the opposite: it deletes the comment
824 delimiters from these lines. @xref{Multi-Line Comments,,, emacs, GNU
825 Emacs Manual}, for fuller details. @code{comment-region} isn't
826 actually part of @ccmode{}; it is given a @ccmode{} binding for
827 convenience.
828
829 @item @kbd{M-;} (@code{comment-dwim} or @code{indent-for-comment} @footnote{The name of this command varies between (X)Emacs versions.})
830 @kindex M-;
831 @findex comment-dwim
832 @findex indent-for-comment
833 Insert a comment at the end of the current line, if none is there
834 already. Then reindent the comment according to @code{comment-column}
835 @ifclear XEMACS
836 (@pxref{Options for Comments,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual})
837 @end ifclear
838 @ifset XEMACS
839 (@pxref{Comments,,, xemacs, XEmacs User's Manual})
840 @end ifset
841 and the variables below. Finally, position the point after the
842 comment starter. @kbd{C-u M-;} kills any comment on the current line,
843 together with any whitespace before it. This is a standard Emacs
844 command, but @ccmode{} enhances it a bit with two variables:
845
846 @defopt c-indent-comment-alist
847 @vindex indent-comment-alist (c-)
848 @vindex comment-column
849 This style variable allows you to vary the column that @kbd{M-;} puts
850 the comment at, depending on what sort of code is on the line, and
851 possibly the indentation of any similar comment on the preceding line.
852 It is an association list that maps different types of lines to
853 actions describing how they should be handled. If a certain line type
854 isn't present on the list then the line is indented to the column
855 specified by @code{comment-column}.
856
857 See the documentation string for a full description of this
858 variable (use @kbd{C-h v c-indent-comment-alist}).
859 @end defopt
860
861 @defopt c-indent-comments-syntactically-p
862 @vindex indent-comments-syntactically-p (c-)
863 Normally, when this style variable is @code{nil}, @kbd{M-;} will
864 indent comment-only lines according to @code{c-indent-comment-alist},
865 just as it does with lines where other code precede the comments.
866 However, if you want it to act just like @key{TAB} for comment-only
867 lines you can get that by setting
868 @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} to non-@code{nil}.
869
870 If @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} is non-@code{nil} then
871 @code{c-indent-comment-alist} won't be consulted at all for comment-only
872 lines.
873 @end defopt
874 @end table
875
876 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
877 @node Movement Commands, Filling and Breaking, Comment Commands, Commands
878 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
879 @section Movement Commands
880 @cindex movement
881 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
882
883 @ccmode{} contains some useful commands for moving around in C code.
884
885 @table @asis
886 @item @kbd{C-M-a} (@code{c-beginning-of-defun})
887 @itemx @kbd{C-M-e} (@code{c-end-of-defun})
888 @findex c-beginning-of-defun
889 @findex c-end-of-defun
890 @vindex c-defun-tactic
891 @vindex defun-tactic (c-)
892
893 Move to the beginning or end of the current or next function. Other
894 constructs (such as a structs or classes) which have a brace block
895 also count as ``functions'' here. To move over several functions, you
896 can give these commands a repeat count.
897
898 The start of a function is at its header. The end of the function is
899 after its closing brace, or after the semicolon of a construct (such
900 as a @code{struct}) which doesn't end at the brace. These two
901 commands try to leave point at the beginning of a line near the actual
902 start or end of the function. This occasionally causes point not to
903 move at all.
904
905 By default, these commands will recognize functions contained within a
906 @dfn{declaration scope} such as a C++ @code{class} or @code{namespace}
907 construct, should the point start inside it. If @ccmode fails to find
908 function beginnings or ends inside the current declaration scope, it
909 will search the enclosing scopes. If you want @ccmode to recognize
910 functions only at the top level@footnote{this was @ccmode{}'s
911 behavior prior to version 5.32.}, set @code{c-defun-tactic} to
912 @code{t}.
913
914 These functions are analogous to the Emacs built-in commands
915 @code{beginning-of-defun} and @code{end-of-defun}, except they
916 eliminate the constraint that the top-level opening brace of the defun
917 must be in column zero. See @ref{Defuns,,,@emacsman{},
918 @emacsmantitle{}}, for more information.
919
920 @item @kbd{C-M-a} (AWK Mode) (@code{c-awk-beginning-of-defun})
921 @itemx @kbd{C-M-e} (AWK Mode) (@code{c-awk-end-of-defun})
922 @kindex C-M-a (AWK Mode)
923 @kindex C-M-e (AWK Mode)
924 @findex c-awk-beginning-of-defun
925 @findex awk-beginning-of-defun (c-)
926 @findex c-awk-end-of-defun
927 @findex awk-end-of-defun (c-)
928 Move to the beginning or end of the current or next AWK defun. These
929 commands can take prefix-arguments, their functionality being entirely
930 equivalent to @code{beginning-of-defun} and @code{end-of-defun}.
931
932 AWK Mode @dfn{defuns} are either pattern/action pairs (either of which
933 might be implicit) or user defined functions. Having the @samp{@{} and
934 @samp{@}} (if there are any) in column zero, as is suggested for some
935 modes, is neither necessary nor helpful in AWK mode.
936
937 @item @kbd{M-a} (@code{c-beginning-of-statement})
938 @itemx @kbd{M-e} (@code{c-end-of-statement})
939 @kindex M-a
940 @kindex M-e
941 @findex c-beginning-of-statement
942 @findex c-end-of-statement
943 @findex beginning-of-statement (c-)
944 @findex end-of-statement (c-)
945 Move to the beginning or end of the innermost C statement. If point
946 is already there, move to the next beginning or end of a statement,
947 even if that means moving into a block. (Use @kbd{C-M-b} or
948 @kbd{C-M-f} to move over a balanced block.) A prefix argument @var{n}
949 means move over @var{n} statements.
950
951 If point is within or next to a comment or a string which spans more
952 than one line, these commands move by sentences instead of statements.
953
954 When called from a program, these functions take three optional
955 arguments: the repetition count, a buffer position limit which is the
956 farthest back to search for the syntactic context, and a flag saying
957 whether to do sentence motion in or near comments and multiline
958 strings.
959
960 @item @kbd{C-c C-u} (@code{c-up-conditional})
961 @kindex C-c C-u
962 @findex c-up-conditional
963 @findex up-conditional (c-)
964 Move back to the containing preprocessor conditional, leaving the mark
965 behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a negative
966 argument, move forward to the end of the containing preprocessor
967 conditional.
968
969 @samp{#elif} is treated like @samp{#else} followed by @samp{#if}, so the
970 function stops at them when going backward, but not when going
971 forward.
972
973 This key sequence is not bound in AWK Mode, which doesn't have
974 preprocessor statements.
975
976 @item @kbd{M-x c-up-conditional-with-else}
977 @findex c-up-conditional-with-else
978 @findex up-conditional-with-else (c-)
979 A variety of @code{c-up-conditional} that also stops at @samp{#else}
980 lines. Normally those lines are ignored.
981
982 @item @kbd{M-x c-down-conditional}
983 @findex c-down-conditional
984 @findex down-conditional (c-)
985 Move forward into the next nested preprocessor conditional, leaving
986 the mark behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a
987 negative argument, move backward into the previous nested preprocessor
988 conditional.
989
990 @samp{#elif} is treated like @samp{#else} followed by @samp{#if}, so the
991 function stops at them when going forward, but not when going backward.
992
993 @item @kbd{M-x c-down-conditional-with-else}
994 @findex c-down-conditional-with-else
995 @findex down-conditional-with-else (c-)
996 A variety of @code{c-down-conditional} that also stops at @samp{#else}
997 lines. Normally those lines are ignored.
998
999 @item @kbd{C-c C-p} (@code{c-backward-conditional})
1000 @itemx @kbd{C-c C-n} (@code{c-forward-conditional})
1001 @kindex C-c C-p
1002 @kindex C-c C-n
1003 @findex c-backward-conditional
1004 @findex c-forward-conditional
1005 @findex backward-conditional (c-)
1006 @findex forward-conditional (c-)
1007 Move backward or forward across a preprocessor conditional, leaving
1008 the mark behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a
1009 negative argument, move in the opposite direction.
1010
1011 These key sequences are not bound in AWK Mode, which doesn't have
1012 preprocessor statements.
1013
1014 @item @kbd{M-x c-backward-into-nomenclature}
1015 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-forward-into-nomenclature}
1016 @findex c-backward-into-nomenclature
1017 @findex c-forward-into-nomenclature
1018 @findex backward-into-nomenclature (c-)
1019 @findex forward-into-nomenclature (c-)
1020 A popular programming style, especially for object-oriented languages
1021 such as C++ is to write symbols in a mixed case format, where the
1022 first letter of each word is capitalized, and not separated by
1023 underscores. E.g., @samp{SymbolsWithMixedCaseAndNoUnderlines}.
1024
1025 These commands move backward or forward to the beginning of the next
1026 capitalized word. With prefix argument @var{n}, move @var{n} times.
1027 If @var{n} is negative, move in the opposite direction.
1028
1029 Note that these two commands have been superseded by
1030 @code{subword-mode}, which you should use instead. @xref{Subword
1031 Movement}. They might be removed from a future release of @ccmode{}.
1032 @end table
1033
1034 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1035 @node Filling and Breaking, Minor Modes, Movement Commands, Commands
1036 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1037 @section Filling and Line Breaking Commands
1038 @cindex text filling
1039 @cindex line breaking
1040 @cindex comment handling
1041 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1042
1043 Since there's a lot of normal text in comments and string literals,
1044 @ccmode{} provides features to edit these like in text mode. The goal
1045 is to do it seamlessly, i.e., you can use auto fill mode, sentence and
1046 paragraph movement, paragraph filling, adaptive filling etc. wherever
1047 there's a piece of normal text without having to think much about it.
1048 @ccmode{} keeps the indentation, fixes suitable comment line prefixes,
1049 and so on.
1050
1051 You can configure the exact way comments get filled and broken, and
1052 where Emacs does auto-filling (see @pxref{Custom Filling and
1053 Breaking}). Typically, the style system (@pxref{Styles}) will have
1054 set this up for you, so you probably won't have to bother.
1055
1056 @findex auto-fill-mode
1057 @cindex Auto Fill mode
1058 @cindex paragraph filling
1059 Line breaks are by default handled (almost) the same regardless of
1060 whether they are made by auto fill mode (@pxref{Auto
1061 Fill,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}), by paragraph filling (e.g., with
1062 @kbd{M-q}), or explicitly with @kbd{M-j} or similar methods. In
1063 string literals, the new line gets the same indentation as the
1064 previous nonempty line.@footnote{You can change this default by
1065 setting the @code{string} syntactic symbol (@pxref{Syntactic Symbols}
1066 and @pxref{Customizing Indentation})}.
1067
1068 @table @asis
1069 @item @kbd{M-q} (@code{c-fill-paragraph})
1070 @kindex M-q
1071 @findex c-fill-paragraph
1072 @findex fill-paragraph (c-)
1073 @cindex Javadoc markup
1074 @cindex Pike autodoc markup
1075 This command fills multiline string literals and both block
1076 and line style comments. In Java buffers, the Javadoc markup words
1077 are recognized as paragraph starters. The line oriented Pike autodoc
1078 markup words are recognized in the same way in Pike mode.
1079
1080 The formatting of the starters (@code{/*}) and enders (@code{*/}) of
1081 block comments are kept as they were before the filling. I.e., if
1082 either the starter or ender were on a line of its own, then it stays
1083 on its own line; conversely, if the delimiter has comment text on its
1084 line, it keeps at least one word of that text with it on the line.
1085
1086 This command is the replacement for @code{fill-paragraph} in @ccmode{}
1087 buffers.
1088
1089 @item @kbd{M-j} (@code{c-indent-new-comment-line})
1090 @kindex M-j
1091 @findex c-indent-new-comment-line
1092 @findex indent-new-comment-line (c-)
1093 This breaks the current line at point and indents the new line. If
1094 point was in a comment, the new line gets the proper comment line
1095 prefix. If point was inside a macro, a backslash is inserted before
1096 the line break. It is the replacement for
1097 @code{indent-new-comment-line}.
1098
1099 @item @kbd{M-x c-context-line-break}
1100 @findex c-context-line-break
1101 @findex context-line-break (c-)
1102 Insert a line break suitable to the context: If the point is inside a
1103 comment, the new line gets the suitable indentation and comment line
1104 prefix like @code{c-indent-new-comment-line}. In normal code it's
1105 indented like @code{newline-and-indent} would do. In macros it acts
1106 like @code{newline-and-indent} but additionally inserts and optionally
1107 aligns the line ending backslash so that the macro remains unbroken.
1108 @xref{Custom Macros}, for details about the backslash alignment. In a
1109 string, a backslash is inserted only if the string is within a
1110 macro@footnote{In GCC, unescaped line breaks within strings are
1111 valid.}.
1112
1113 This function is not bound to a key by default, but it's intended to be
1114 used on the @kbd{RET} key. If you like the behavior of
1115 @code{newline-and-indent} on @kbd{RET}, you should consider switching to
1116 this function. @xref{Sample .emacs File}.
1117
1118 @item @kbd{M-x c-context-open-line}
1119 @findex c-context-open-line
1120 @findex context-open-line (c-)
1121 This is to @kbd{C-o} (@kbd{M-x open-line}) as
1122 @code{c-context-line-break} is to @kbd{RET}. I.e., it works just like
1123 @code{c-context-line-break} but leaves the point before the inserted
1124 line break.
1125 @end table
1126
1127
1128 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1129 @node Minor Modes, Electric Keys, Filling and Breaking, Commands
1130 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1131 @section Minor Modes
1132 @cindex Minor Modes
1133 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1134
1135 @ccmode{} contains several minor-mode-like features that you might
1136 find useful while writing new code or editing old code:
1137
1138 @table @asis
1139 @item electric mode
1140 When this is enabled, certain visible characters cause reformatting as
1141 they are typed. This is normally helpful, but can be a nuisance when
1142 editing chaotically formatted code. It can also be disconcerting,
1143 especially for users who are new to @ccmode{}.
1144 @item auto-newline mode
1145 This automatically inserts newlines where you'd probably want to type
1146 them yourself, e.g., after typing @samp{@}}s. Its action is suppressed
1147 when electric mode is disabled.
1148 @item hungry-delete mode
1149 This lets you delete a contiguous block of whitespace with a single
1150 key: for example, the newline and indentation just inserted by
1151 auto-newline when you want to back up and write a comment after the
1152 last statement.
1153 @item subword mode
1154 This mode makes basic word movement commands like @kbd{M-f}
1155 (@code{forward-word}) and @kbd{M-b} (@code{backward-word}) treat the
1156 parts of sillycapsed symbols as different words.
1157 E.g., @samp{NSGraphicsContext} is treated as three words @samp{NS},
1158 @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}.
1159 @item syntactic-indentation mode
1160 When this is enabled (which it normally is), indentation commands such
1161 as @kbd{C-j} indent lines of code according to their syntactic
1162 structure. Otherwise, a line is simply indented to the same level as
1163 the previous one and @kbd{@key{TAB}} adjusts the indentation in steps
1164 of `c-basic-offset'.
1165 @end table
1166
1167 Full details on how these minor modes work are at @ref{Electric Keys},
1168 @ref{Auto-newlines}, @ref{Hungry WS Deletion}, @ref{Subword Movement},
1169 and @ref{Indentation Engine Basics}.
1170
1171 You can toggle each of these minor modes on and off, and you can
1172 configure @ccmode{} so that it starts up with your favorite
1173 combination of them (@pxref{Sample .emacs File}). By default, when
1174 you initialize a buffer, electric mode and syntactic-indentation mode
1175 are enabled but the other two modes are disabled.
1176
1177 @ccmode{} displays the current state of the first four of these minor
1178 modes on the modeline by appending letters to the major mode's name,
1179 one letter for each enabled minor mode: @samp{l} for electric mode,
1180 @samp{a} for auto-newline mode, @samp{h} for hungry delete mode, and
1181 @samp{w} for subword mode. If all these modes were enabled, you'd see
1182 @samp{C/lahw}@footnote{The @samp{C} would be replaced with the name of
1183 the language in question for the other languages @ccmode{} supports.}.
1184
1185 Here are the commands to toggle these modes:
1186
1187 @table @asis
1188 @item @kbd{C-c C-l} (@code{c-toggle-electric-state})
1189 @kindex C-c C-l
1190 @findex c-toggle-electric-state
1191 @findex toggle-electric-state (c-)
1192 Toggle electric minor mode. When the command turns the mode off, it
1193 also suppresses auto-newline mode.
1194
1195 @item @kbd{C-c C-a} (@code{c-toggle-auto-newline})
1196 @kindex C-c C-a
1197 @findex c-toggle-auto-newline
1198 @findex toggle-auto-newline (c-)
1199 Toggle auto-newline minor mode. When the command turns the mode on,
1200 it also enables electric minor mode.
1201
1202 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command was bound to @kbd{C-c C-d}.}
1203 @findex c-toggle-hungry-state
1204 @findex toggle-hungry-state (c-)
1205 Toggle hungry-delete minor mode.
1206
1207 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-auto-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command was bound to @kbd{C-c C-t}.}
1208 @findex c-toggle-auto-hungry-state
1209 @findex toggle-auto-hungry-state (c-)
1210 Toggle both auto-newline and hungry delete minor modes.
1211
1212 @item @kbd{C-c C-w} (@code{M-x subword-mode})
1213 @kindex C-c C-w
1214 @findex subword-mode
1215 Toggle subword mode.
1216
1217 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-syntactic-indentation}
1218 @findex c-toggle-syntactic-indentation
1219 @findex toggle-syntactic-indentation (c-)
1220 Toggle syntactic-indentation mode.
1221 @end table
1222
1223 Common to all the toggle functions above is that if they are called
1224 programmatically, they take an optional numerical argument. A
1225 positive value will turn on the minor mode (or both of them in the
1226 case of @code{c-toggle-auto-hungry-state}) and a negative value will
1227 turn it (or them) off.
1228
1229
1230 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1231 @node Electric Keys, Auto-newlines, Minor Modes, Commands
1232 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1233 @section Electric Keys and Keywords
1234 @cindex electric characters
1235 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1236
1237 Most punctuation keys provide @dfn{electric} behavior: as well as
1238 inserting themselves they perform some other action, such as
1239 reindenting the line. This reindentation saves you from having to
1240 reindent a line manually after typing, say, a @samp{@}}. A few
1241 keywords, such as @code{else}, also trigger electric action.
1242
1243 You can inhibit the electric behavior described here by disabling
1244 electric minor mode (@pxref{Minor Modes}).
1245
1246 Common to all these keys is that they only behave electrically when
1247 used in normal code (as contrasted with getting typed in a string
1248 literal or comment). Those which cause re-indentation do so only when
1249 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} has a non-@code{nil} value (which it
1250 does by default).
1251
1252 These keys and keywords are:
1253 @c ACM, 2004/8/24: c-electric-pound doesn't check c-s-i: this is more
1254 @c like a bug in the code than a bug in this document. It'll get
1255 @c fixed in the code sometime.
1256
1257 @table @kbd
1258 @item #
1259 @kindex #
1260 @findex c-electric-pound
1261 @findex electric-pound (c-)
1262 @vindex c-electric-pound-behavior
1263 @vindex electric-pound-behavior (c-)
1264 Pound (bound to @code{c-electric-pound}) is electric when typed as the
1265 first non-whitespace character on a line and not within a macro
1266 definition. In this case, the variable @code{c-electric-pound-behavior}
1267 is consulted for the electric behavior. This variable takes a list
1268 value, although the only element currently defined is @code{alignleft},
1269 which tells this command to force the @samp{#} character into column
1270 zero. This is useful for entering preprocessor macro definitions.
1271
1272 Pound is not electric in AWK buffers, where @samp{#} starts a comment,
1273 and is bound to @code{self-insert-command} like any typical printable
1274 character.
1275 @c ACM, 2004/8/24: Change this (and the code) to do AWK comment
1276 @c reindentation.
1277
1278 @item *
1279 @kindex *
1280 @itemx /
1281 @kindex /
1282 @findex c-electric-star
1283 @findex electric-star (c-)
1284 @findex c-electric-slash
1285 @findex electric-slash (c-)
1286 A star (bound to @code{c-electric-star}) or a slash
1287 (@code{c-electric-slash}) causes reindentation when you type it as the
1288 second component of a C style block comment opener (@samp{/*}) or a
1289 C++ line comment opener (@samp{//}) respectively, but only if the
1290 comment opener is the first thing on the line (i.e., there's only
1291 whitespace before it).
1292
1293 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} so that typing a slash at
1294 the start of a line within a block comment will terminate the
1295 comment. You don't need to have electric minor mode enabled to get
1296 this behavior. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1297
1298 In AWK mode, @samp{*} and @samp{/} do not delimit comments and are not
1299 electric.
1300
1301 @item <
1302 @kindex <
1303 @itemx >
1304 @kindex >
1305 @findex c-electric-lt-gt
1306 @findex electric-lt-gt (c-)
1307 A less-than or greater-than sign (bound to @code{c-electric-lt-gt}) is
1308 electric in two circumstances: when it is an angle bracket in a C++
1309 @samp{template} declaration (and similar constructs in other
1310 languages) and when it is the second of two @kbd{<} or @kbd{>}
1311 characters in a C++ style stream operator. In either case, the line
1312 is reindented. Angle brackets in C @samp{#include} directives are not
1313 electric.
1314
1315 @item (
1316 @kindex (
1317 @itemx )
1318 @kindex )
1319 @findex c-electric-paren
1320 @findex electric-paren (c-)
1321 The normal parenthesis characters @samp{(} and @samp{)} (bound to
1322 @code{c-electric-paren}) reindent the current line. This is useful
1323 for getting the closing parenthesis of an argument list aligned
1324 automatically.
1325
1326 You can also configure @ccmode{} to insert a space automatically
1327 between a function name and the @samp{(} you've just typed, and to
1328 remove it automatically after typing @samp{)}, should the argument
1329 list be empty. You don't need to have electric minor mode enabled to
1330 get these actions. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1331
1332 @item @{
1333 @kindex @{
1334 @itemx @}
1335 @kindex @}
1336 @findex c-electric-brace
1337 @findex electric-brace (c-)
1338 Typing a brace (bound to @code{c-electric-brace}) reindents the
1339 current line. Also, one or more newlines might be inserted if
1340 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}.
1341 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} to compact excess whitespace
1342 inserted by auto-newline mode in certain circumstances.
1343 @xref{Clean-ups}.
1344
1345 @item :
1346 @kindex :
1347 @findex c-electric-colon
1348 @findex electric-colon (c-)
1349 Typing a colon (bound to @code{c-electric-colon}) reindents the
1350 current line. Additionally, one or more newlines might be inserted if
1351 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}. If you
1352 type a second colon immediately after such an auto-newline, by default
1353 the whitespace between the two colons is removed, leaving a C++ scope
1354 operator. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1355
1356 If you prefer, you can insert @samp{::} in a single operation,
1357 avoiding all these spurious reindentations, newlines, and clean-ups.
1358 @xref{Other Commands}.
1359
1360 @item ;
1361 @kindex ;
1362 @itemx ,
1363 @kindex ,
1364 @findex c-electric-semi&comma
1365 @findex electric-semi&comma (c-)
1366 Typing a semicolon or comma (bound to @code{c-electric-semi&comma})
1367 reindents the current line. Also, a newline might be inserted if
1368 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}.
1369 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} so that when auto-newline
1370 has inserted whitespace after a @samp{@}}, it will be removed again
1371 when you type a semicolon or comma just after it. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1372
1373 @end table
1374
1375 @deffn Command c-electric-continued-statement
1376 @findex electric-continued-statement (c-)
1377
1378 Certain keywords are electric, causing reindentation when they are
1379 preceded only by whitespace on the line. The keywords are those that
1380 continue an earlier statement instead of starting a new one:
1381 @code{else}, @code{while}, @code{catch} (only in C++ and Java) and
1382 @code{finally} (only in Java).
1383
1384 An example:
1385
1386 @example
1387 @group
1388 for (i = 0; i < 17; i++)
1389 if (a[i])
1390 res += a[i]->offset;
1391 else
1392 @end group
1393 @end example
1394
1395 Here, the @code{else} should be indented like the preceding @code{if},
1396 since it continues that statement. @ccmode{} will automatically
1397 reindent it after the @code{else} has been typed in full, since only
1398 then is it possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a
1399 continuation of the preceding @code{if}.
1400
1401 @vindex abbrev-mode
1402 @findex abbrev-mode
1403 @cindex Abbrev mode
1404 @ccmode{} uses Abbrev mode (@pxref{Abbrevs,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}})
1405 to accomplish this. It's therefore turned on by default in all language
1406 modes except IDL mode, since CORBA IDL doesn't have any statements.
1407 @end deffn
1408
1409
1410 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1411 @node Auto-newlines, Hungry WS Deletion, Electric Keys, Commands
1412 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1413 @section Auto-newline Insertion
1414 @cindex auto-newline
1415 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1416
1417 When you have @dfn{Auto-newline minor mode} enabled (@pxref{Minor
1418 Modes}), @ccmode{} inserts newlines for you automatically (in certain
1419 syntactic contexts) when you type a left or right brace, a colon, a
1420 semicolon, or a comma. Sometimes a newline appears before the
1421 character you type, sometimes after it, sometimes both.
1422
1423 Auto-newline only triggers when the following conditions hold:
1424
1425 @itemize @bullet
1426 @item
1427 Auto-newline minor mode is enabled, as evidenced by the indicator
1428 @samp{a} after the mode name on the modeline (e.g., @samp{C/a} or
1429 @samp{C/la}).
1430
1431 @item
1432 The character was typed at the end of a line, or with only whitespace
1433 after it, and possibly a @samp{\} escaping the newline.
1434
1435 @item
1436 The character is not on its own line already. (This applies only to
1437 insertion of a newline @emph{before} the character.)
1438
1439 @item
1440 @cindex literal
1441 @cindex syntactic whitespace
1442 The character was not typed inside of a literal @footnote{A
1443 @dfn{literal} is defined as any comment, string, or preprocessor macro
1444 definition. These constructs are also known as @dfn{syntactic
1445 whitespace} since they are usually ignored when scanning C code.}.
1446
1447 @item
1448 No numeric argument was supplied to the command (i.e., it was typed as
1449 normal, with no @kbd{C-u} prefix).
1450 @end itemize
1451
1452 You can configure the precise circumstances in which newlines get
1453 inserted (see @pxref{Custom Auto-newlines}). Typically, the style
1454 system (@pxref{Styles}) will have set this up for you, so you probably
1455 won't have to bother.
1456
1457 Sometimes @ccmode{} inserts an auto-newline where you don't want one,
1458 such as after a @samp{@}} when you're about to type a @samp{;}.
1459 Hungry deletion can help here (@pxref{Hungry WS Deletion}), or you can
1460 activate an appropriate @dfn{clean-up}, which will remove the excess
1461 whitespace after you've typed the @samp{;}. See @ref{Clean-ups} for a
1462 full description. See also @ref{Electric Keys} for a summary of
1463 clean-ups listed by key.
1464
1465
1466 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1467 @node Hungry WS Deletion, Subword Movement, Auto-newlines, Commands
1468 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1469 @section Hungry Deletion of Whitespace
1470 @cindex hungry-deletion
1471 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1472
1473 If you want to delete an entire block of whitespace at point, you can
1474 use @dfn{hungry deletion}. This deletes all the contiguous whitespace
1475 either before point or after point in a single operation.
1476 ``Whitespace'' here includes tabs and newlines, but not comments or
1477 preprocessor commands. Hungry deletion can markedly cut down on the
1478 number of times you have to hit deletion keys when, for example,
1479 you've made a mistake on the preceding line and have already pressed
1480 @kbd{C-j}.
1481
1482 Hungry deletion is a simple feature that some people find extremely
1483 useful. In fact, you might find yourself wanting it in @strong{all}
1484 your editing modes!
1485
1486 Loosely speaking, in what follows, @dfn{@key{DEL}} means ``the
1487 backspace key'' and @dfn{@key{DELETE}} means ``the forward delete
1488 key''. This is discussed in more detail below.
1489
1490 There are two different ways you can use hungry deletion:
1491
1492 @table @asis
1493 @item Using @dfn{Hungry Delete Mode} with @kbd{@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-d}
1494 Here you toggle Hungry Delete minor mode with @kbd{M-x
1495 c-toggle-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command
1496 was bound to @kbd{C-c C-d}. @kbd{C-c C-d} is now the default binding
1497 for @code{c-hungry-delete-forward}.} (@pxref{Minor Modes}.) This
1498 makes @kbd{@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-d} do backwards and forward hungry
1499 deletion.
1500
1501 @table @asis
1502 @item @kbd{@key{DEL}} (@code{c-electric-backspace})
1503 @kindex DEL
1504 @findex c-electric-backspace
1505 @findex electric-backspace (c-)
1506 This command is run by default when you hit the @kbd{DEL} key. When
1507 hungry delete mode is enabled, it deletes any amount of whitespace in
1508 the backwards direction. Otherwise, or when used with a prefix
1509 argument or in a literal (@pxref{Auto-newlines}), the command just
1510 deletes backwards in the usual way. (More precisely, it calls the
1511 function contained in the variable @code{c-backspace-function},
1512 passing it the prefix argument, if any.)
1513
1514 @item @code{c-backspace-function}
1515 @vindex c-backspace-function
1516 @vindex backspace-function (c-)
1517 @findex backward-delete-char-untabify
1518 Hook that gets called by @code{c-electric-backspace} when it doesn't
1519 do an ``electric'' deletion of the preceding whitespace. The default
1520 value is @code{backward-delete-char-untabify}
1521 (@pxref{Deletion,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}, the function which
1522 deletes a single character.
1523
1524 @item @kbd{C-d} (@code{c-electric-delete-forward})
1525 @kindex C-d
1526 @findex c-electric-delete-forward
1527 @findex electric-delete-forward (c-)
1528 This function, which is bound to @kbd{C-d} by default, works just like
1529 @code{c-electric-backspace} but in the forward direction. When it
1530 doesn't do an ``electric'' deletion of the following whitespace, it
1531 just does @code{delete-char}, more or less. (Strictly speaking, it
1532 calls the function in @code{c-delete-function} with the prefix
1533 argument.)
1534
1535 @item @code{c-delete-function}
1536 @vindex c-delete-function
1537 @vindex delete-function (c-)
1538 @findex delete-char
1539 Hook that gets called by @code{c-electric-delete-forward} when it
1540 doesn't do an ``electric'' deletion of the following whitespace. The
1541 default value is @code{delete-char}.
1542 @end table
1543
1544 @item Using Distinct Bindings
1545 The other (newer and recommended) way to use hungry deletion is to
1546 perform @code{c-hungry-delete-backwards} and
1547 @code{c-hungry-delete-forward} directly through their key sequences
1548 rather than using the minor mode toggling.
1549
1550 @table @asis
1551 @item @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}}, or @kbd{C-c @key{DEL}} (@code{c-hungry-delete-backwards})@footnote{This command was formerly known as @code{c-hungry-backspace}.}
1552 @kindex C-c C-<backspace>
1553 @kindex C-c <backspace>
1554 @kindex C-c C-DEL
1555 @kindex C-c DEL
1556 @findex c-hungry-delete-backwards
1557 @findex hungry-delete-backwards (c-)
1558 Delete any amount of whitespace in the backwards direction (regardless
1559 whether hungry-delete mode is enabled or not). This command is bound
1560 to both @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-c @key{DEL}}, since the more
1561 natural one, @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}}, is sometimes difficult to type at
1562 a character terminal.
1563
1564 @item @kbd{C-c C-d}, @kbd{C-c C-@key{DELETE}}, or @kbd{C-c @key{DELETE}} (@code{c-hungry-delete-forward})
1565 @kindex C-c C-d
1566 @kindex C-c C-<DELETE>
1567 @kindex C-c <DELETE>
1568 @findex c-hungry-delete-forward
1569 @findex hungry-delete-forward (c-)
1570 Delete any amount of whitespace in the forward direction (regardless
1571 whether hungry-delete mode is enabled or not). This command is bound
1572 to both @kbd{C-c C-@key{DELETE}} and @kbd{C-c @key{DELETE}} for the
1573 same reason as for @key{DEL} above.
1574 @end table
1575 @end table
1576
1577 @kindex <delete>
1578 @kindex <backspace>
1579
1580 When we talk about @kbd{@key{DEL}}, and @kbd{@key{DELETE}} above, we
1581 actually do so without connecting them to the physical keys commonly
1582 known as @key{Backspace} and @key{Delete}. The default bindings to
1583 those two keys depends on the flavor of (X)Emacs you are using.
1584
1585 @findex c-electric-delete
1586 @findex electric-delete (c-)
1587 @findex c-hungry-delete
1588 @findex hungry-delete (c-)
1589 @vindex delete-key-deletes-forward
1590 In XEmacs 20.3 and beyond, the @key{Backspace} key is bound to
1591 @code{c-electric-backspace} and the @key{Delete} key is bound to
1592 @code{c-electric-delete}. You control the direction it deletes in by
1593 setting the variable @code{delete-key-deletes-forward}, a standard
1594 XEmacs variable.
1595 @c This variable is encapsulated by XEmacs's (defsubst delete-forward-p ...).
1596 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{c-electric-delete} will do
1597 forward deletion with @code{c-electric-delete-forward}, otherwise it
1598 does backward deletion with @code{c-electric-backspace}. Similarly,
1599 @kbd{C-c @key{Delete}} and @kbd{C-c C-@key{Delete}} are bound to
1600 @code{c-hungry-delete} which is controlled in the same way by
1601 @code{delete-key-deletes-forward}.
1602
1603 @findex normal-erase-is-backspace-mode
1604
1605 Emacs 21 and later automatically binds @key{Backspace} and
1606 @key{Delete} to @kbd{DEL} and @kbd{C-d} according to your environment,
1607 and @ccmode{} extends those bindings to @kbd{C-c C-@key{Backspace}}
1608 etc. If you need to change the bindings through
1609 @code{normal-erase-is-backspace-mode} then @ccmode{} will also adapt
1610 its extended bindings accordingly.
1611
1612 In earlier (X)Emacs versions, @ccmode{} doesn't bind either
1613 @key{Backspace} or @key{Delete} directly. Only the key codes
1614 @kbd{DEL} and @kbd{C-d} are bound, and it's up to the default bindings
1615 to map the physical keys to them. You might need to modify this
1616 yourself if the defaults are unsuitable.
1617
1618 Getting your @key{Backspace} and @key{Delete} keys properly set up can
1619 sometimes be tricky. The information in @ref{DEL Does Not
1620 Delete,,,emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, might be helpful if you're having
1621 trouble with this in GNU Emacs.
1622
1623
1624 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1625 @node Subword Movement, Other Commands, Hungry WS Deletion, Commands
1626 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1627 @section Subword Movement and Editing
1628 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1629
1630 @cindex nomenclature
1631 @cindex subword
1632 In spite of the GNU Coding Standards, it is popular to name a symbol
1633 by mixing uppercase and lowercase letters, e.g., @samp{GtkWidget},
1634 @samp{EmacsFrameClass}, or @samp{NSGraphicsContext}. Here we call
1635 these mixed case symbols @dfn{nomenclatures}. Also, each capitalized
1636 (or completely uppercase) part of a nomenclature is called a
1637 @dfn{subword}. Here are some examples:
1638
1639 @multitable {@samp{NSGraphicsContext}} {@samp{NS}, @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}}
1640 @c This could be converted to @headitem when we require Texinfo 4.7
1641 @iftex
1642 @item @b{Nomenclature}
1643 @tab @b{Subwords}
1644 @end iftex
1645 @ifnottex
1646 @item Nomenclature
1647 @tab Subwords
1648 @item ---------------------------------------------------------
1649 @end ifnottex
1650 @item @samp{GtkWindow}
1651 @tab @samp{Gtk} and @samp{Window}
1652 @item @samp{EmacsFrameClass}
1653 @tab @samp{Emacs}, @samp{Frame}, and @samp{Class}
1654 @item @samp{NSGraphicsContext}
1655 @tab @samp{NS}, @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}
1656 @end multitable
1657
1658 The subword minor mode replaces the basic word oriented movement and
1659 editing commands with variants that recognize subwords in a
1660 nomenclature and treat them as separate words:
1661
1662 @findex c-forward-subword
1663 @findex forward-subword (c-)
1664 @findex c-backward-subword
1665 @findex backward-subword (c-)
1666 @findex c-mark-subword
1667 @findex mark-subword (c-)
1668 @findex c-kill-subword
1669 @findex kill-subword (c-)
1670 @findex c-backward-kill-subword
1671 @findex backward-kill-subword (c-)
1672 @findex c-transpose-subwords
1673 @findex transpose-subwords (c-)
1674 @findex c-capitalize-subword
1675 @findex capitalize-subword (c-)
1676 @findex c-upcase-subword
1677 @findex upcase-subword (c-)
1678 @findex c-downcase-subword
1679 @findex downcase-subword (c-)
1680 @multitable @columnfractions .20 .40 .40
1681 @c This could be converted to @headitem when we require Texinfo 4.7
1682 @iftex
1683 @item @b{Key} @tab @b{Word oriented command} @tab @b{Subword oriented command}
1684 @end iftex
1685 @ifnottex
1686 @item Key @tab Word oriented command @tab Subword oriented command
1687 @item ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1688 @end ifnottex
1689 @item @kbd{M-f} @tab @code{forward-word} @tab @code{c-forward-subword}
1690 @item @kbd{M-b} @tab @code{backward-word} @tab @code{c-backward-subword}
1691 @item @kbd{M-@@} @tab @code{mark-word} @tab @code{c-mark-subword}
1692 @item @kbd{M-d} @tab @code{kill-word} @tab @code{c-kill-subword}
1693 @item @kbd{M-DEL} @tab @code{backward-kill-word} @tab @code{c-backward-kill-subword}
1694 @item @kbd{M-t} @tab @code{transpose-words} @tab @code{c-transpose-subwords}
1695 @item @kbd{M-c} @tab @code{capitalize-word} @tab @code{c-capitalize-subword}
1696 @item @kbd{M-u} @tab @code{upcase-word} @tab @code{c-upcase-subword}
1697 @item @kbd{M-l} @tab @code{downcase-word} @tab @code{c-downcase-subword}
1698 @end multitable
1699
1700 Note that if you have changed the key bindings for the word oriented
1701 commands in your @file{.emacs} or a similar place, the keys you have
1702 configured are also used for the corresponding subword oriented
1703 commands.
1704
1705 Type @kbd{C-c C-w} to toggle subword mode on and off. To make the
1706 mode turn on automatically, put the following code in your
1707 @file{.emacs}:
1708
1709 @example
1710 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook
1711 (lambda () (subword-mode 1)))
1712 @end example
1713
1714 As a bonus, you can also use @code{subword-mode} in non-@ccmode{}
1715 buffers by typing @kbd{M-x subword-mode}.
1716
1717 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1718 @node Other Commands, , Subword Movement, Commands
1719 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1720 @section Other Commands
1721 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1722
1723 Here are the various other commands that didn't fit anywhere else:
1724
1725 @table @asis
1726 @item @kbd{C-c .} (@code{c-set-style})
1727 @kindex C-c .
1728 @findex c-set-style
1729 @findex set-style (c-)
1730 Switch to the specified style in the current buffer. Use like this:
1731
1732 @example
1733 @kbd{C-c . @var{style-name} @key{RET}}
1734 @end example
1735
1736 You can use the @key{TAB} in the normal way to do completion on the
1737 style name. Note that all style names are case insensitive, even the
1738 ones you define yourself.
1739
1740 Setting a style in this way does @emph{not} automatically reindent your
1741 file. For commands that you can use to view the effect of your changes,
1742 see @ref{Indentation Commands} and @ref{Filling and Breaking}.
1743
1744 For details of the @ccmode{} style system, see @ref{Styles}.
1745 @item @kbd{C-c :} (@code{c-scope-operator})
1746 @kindex C-c :
1747 @findex c-scope-operator
1748 @findex scope-operator (c-)
1749 In C++, it is also sometimes desirable to insert the double-colon scope
1750 operator without performing the electric behavior of colon insertion.
1751 @kbd{C-c :} does just this.
1752
1753 @item @kbd{C-c C-\} (@code{c-backslash-region})
1754 @kindex C-c C-\
1755 @findex c-backslash-region
1756 @findex backslash-region (c-)
1757 This function inserts and aligns or deletes end-of-line backslashes in
1758 the current region. These are typically used in multi-line macros.
1759
1760 With no prefix argument, it inserts any missing backslashes and aligns
1761 them according to the @code{c-backslash-column} and
1762 @code{c-backslash-max-column} variables. With a prefix argument, it
1763 deletes any backslashes.
1764
1765 The function does not modify blank lines at the start of the region. If
1766 the region ends at the start of a line, it always deletes the backslash
1767 (if any) at the end of the previous line.
1768
1769 To customize the precise workings of this command, @ref{Custom Macros}.
1770 @end table
1771
1772 @noindent
1773 The recommended line breaking function, @code{c-context-line-break}
1774 (@pxref{Filling and Breaking}), is especially nice if you edit
1775 multiline macros frequently. When used inside a macro, it
1776 automatically inserts and adjusts the mandatory backslash at the end
1777 of the line to keep the macro together, and it leaves the point at the
1778 right indentation column for the code. Thus you can write code inside
1779 macros almost exactly as you can elsewhere, without having to bother
1780 with the trailing backslashes.
1781
1782 @table @asis
1783 @item @kbd{C-c C-e} (@code{c-macro-expand})
1784 @kindex C-c C-e
1785 @findex c-macro-expand
1786 @findex macro-expand (c-)
1787 This command expands C, C++, Objective C or Pike macros in the region,
1788 using an appropriate external preprocessor program. Normally it
1789 displays its output in a temporary buffer, but if you give it a prefix
1790 arg (with @kbd{C-u C-c C-e}) it will overwrite the original region
1791 with the expansion.
1792
1793 The command does not work in any of the other modes, and the key
1794 sequence is not bound in these other modes.
1795
1796 @code{c-macro-expand} isn't actually part of @ccmode{}, even though it
1797 is bound to a @ccmode{} key sequence. If you need help setting it up
1798 or have other problems with it, you can either read its source code or
1799 ask for help in the standard (X)Emacs forums.
1800 @end table
1801
1802 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1803 @node Font Locking, Config Basics, Commands, Top
1804 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1805 @chapter Font Locking
1806 @cindex font locking
1807 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1808
1809 @cindex Font Lock mode
1810
1811 @ccmode{} provides font locking for its supported languages by
1812 supplying patterns for use with Font Lock mode. This means that you
1813 get distinct faces on the various syntactic parts such as comments,
1814 strings, keywords and types, which is very helpful in telling them
1815 apart at a glance and discovering syntactic errors. @xref{Font
1816 Lock,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, for ways to enable font locking in
1817 @ccmode{} buffers.
1818
1819 @strong{Please note:} The font locking in AWK mode is currently not
1820 integrated with the rest of @ccmode{}. Only the last section of this
1821 chapter, @ref{AWK Mode Font Locking}, applies to AWK@. The other
1822 sections apply to the other languages.
1823
1824 @menu
1825 * Font Locking Preliminaries::
1826 * Faces::
1827 * Doc Comments::
1828 * AWK Mode Font Locking::
1829 @end menu
1830
1831
1832 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1833 @node Font Locking Preliminaries, Faces, Font Locking, Font Locking
1834 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1835 @section Font Locking Preliminaries
1836 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1837
1838 The font locking for most of the @ccmode{} languages were provided
1839 directly by the Font Lock package prior to version 5.30 of @ccmode{}.
1840 In the transition to @ccmode{} the patterns have been reworked
1841 completely and are applied uniformly across all the languages except AWK
1842 mode, just like the indentation rules (although each language still has
1843 some peculiarities of its own, of course). Since the languages
1844 previously had completely separate font locking patterns, this means
1845 that it's a bit different in most languages now.
1846
1847 The main goal for the font locking in @ccmode{} is accuracy, to provide
1848 a dependable aid in recognizing the various constructs. Some, like
1849 strings and comments, are easy to recognize while others, like
1850 declarations and types, can be very tricky. @ccmode{} can go to great
1851 lengths to recognize declarations and casts correctly, especially when
1852 the types aren't recognized by standard patterns. This is a fairly
1853 demanding analysis which can be slow on older hardware, and it can
1854 therefore be disabled by choosing a lower decoration level with the
1855 variable @code{font-lock-maximum-decoration} (@pxref{Font Lock,,,
1856 emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}).
1857
1858 @vindex font-lock-maximum-decoration
1859
1860 The decoration levels are used as follows:
1861
1862 @enumerate
1863 @comment 1
1864 @item
1865 Minimal font locking: Fontify only comments, strings and preprocessor
1866 directives (in the languages that use cpp).
1867
1868 @comment 2
1869 @item
1870 Fast font locking: In addition to level 1, fontify keywords, simple
1871 types and declarations that are easy to recognize. The variables
1872 @code{*-font-lock-extra-types} (where @samp{*} is the name of the
1873 language) are used to recognize types (see below). Documentation
1874 comments like Javadoc are fontified according to
1875 @code{c-doc-comment-style} (@pxref{Doc Comments}).
1876
1877 Use this if you think the font locking is too slow. It's the closest
1878 corresponding level to level 3 in the old font lock patterns.
1879
1880 @comment 3
1881 @item
1882 Accurate font locking: Like level 2 but uses a different approach that
1883 can recognize types and declarations much more accurately. The
1884 @code{*-font-lock-extra-types} variables are still used, but user
1885 defined types are recognized correctly anyway in most cases. Therefore
1886 those variables should be fairly restrictive and not contain patterns
1887 that are uncertain.
1888
1889 @cindex Lazy Lock mode
1890 @cindex Just-in-time Lock mode
1891
1892 This level is designed for fairly modern hardware and a font lock
1893 support mode like Lazy Lock or Just-in-time Lock mode that only
1894 fontifies the parts that are actually shown. Fontifying the whole
1895 buffer at once can easily get bothersomely slow even on contemporary
1896 hardware. @xref{Font Lock,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}.
1897 @end enumerate
1898
1899 @cindex user defined types
1900 @cindex types, user defined
1901
1902 Since user defined types are hard to recognize you can provide
1903 additional regexps to match those you use:
1904
1905 @defopt c-font-lock-extra-types
1906 @defoptx c++-font-lock-extra-types
1907 @defoptx objc-font-lock-extra-types
1908 @defoptx java-font-lock-extra-types
1909 @defoptx idl-font-lock-extra-types
1910 @defoptx pike-font-lock-extra-types
1911 For each language there's a variable @code{*-font-lock-extra-types},
1912 where @samp{*} stands for the language in question. It contains a list
1913 of regexps that matches identifiers that should be recognized as types,
1914 e.g., @samp{\\sw+_t} to recognize all identifiers ending with @samp{_t}
1915 as is customary in C code. Each regexp should not match more than a
1916 single identifier.
1917
1918 The default values contain regexps for many types in standard runtime
1919 libraries that are otherwise difficult to recognize, and patterns for
1920 standard type naming conventions like the @samp{_t} suffix in C and C++.
1921 Java, Objective-C and Pike have as a convention to start class names
1922 with capitals, so there are patterns for that in those languages.
1923
1924 Despite the names of these variables, they are not only used for
1925 fontification but in other places as well where @ccmode{} needs to
1926 recognize types.
1927 @end defopt
1928
1929
1930 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1931 @node Faces, Doc Comments, Font Locking Preliminaries, Font Locking
1932 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1933 @section Faces
1934 @cindex faces
1935 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1936
1937 @ccmode{} attempts to use the standard faces for programming languages
1938 in accordance with their intended purposes as far as possible. No extra
1939 faces are currently provided, with the exception of a replacement face
1940 @code{c-invalid-face} for emacsen that don't provide
1941 @code{font-lock-warning-face}.
1942
1943 @itemize @bullet
1944 @item
1945 @vindex font-lock-comment-face
1946 Normal comments are fontified in @code{font-lock-comment-face}.
1947
1948 @item
1949 @vindex font-lock-doc-face
1950 @vindex font-lock-doc-string-face
1951 @vindex font-lock-comment-face
1952 Comments that are recognized as documentation (@pxref{Doc Comments})
1953 get @code{font-lock-doc-face} (Emacs) or
1954 @code{font-lock-doc-string-face} (XEmacs) if those faces exist. If
1955 they don't then @code{font-lock-comment-face} is used.
1956
1957 @item
1958 @vindex font-lock-string-face
1959 String and character literals are fontified in
1960 @code{font-lock-string-face}.
1961
1962 @item
1963 @vindex font-lock-keyword-face
1964 Keywords are fontified with @code{font-lock-keyword-face}.
1965
1966 @item
1967 @vindex font-lock-function-name-face
1968 @code{font-lock-function-name-face} is used for function names in
1969 declarations and definitions, and classes in those contexts. It's also
1970 used for preprocessor defines with arguments.
1971
1972 @item
1973 @vindex font-lock-variable-name-face
1974 Variables in declarations and definitions, and other identifiers in such
1975 variable contexts, get @code{font-lock-variable-name-face}. It's also
1976 used for preprocessor defines without arguments.
1977
1978 @item
1979 @vindex font-lock-constant-face
1980 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
1981 Builtin constants are fontified in @code{font-lock-constant-face} if it
1982 exists, @code{font-lock-reference-face} otherwise. As opposed to the
1983 preceding two faces, this is used on the names in expressions, and it's
1984 not used in declarations, even if there happen to be a @samp{const} in
1985 them somewhere.
1986
1987 @item
1988 @vindex font-lock-type-face
1989 @code{font-lock-type-face} is put on types (both predefined and user
1990 defined) and classes in type contexts.
1991
1992 @item
1993 @vindex font-lock-constant-face
1994 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
1995 Label identifiers get @code{font-lock-constant-face} if it exists,
1996 @code{font-lock-reference-face} otherwise.
1997
1998 @item
1999 Name qualifiers and identifiers for scope constructs are fontified like
2000 labels.
2001
2002 @item
2003 Special markup inside documentation comments are also fontified like
2004 labels.
2005
2006 @item
2007 @vindex font-lock-preprocessor-face
2008 @vindex font-lock-builtin-face
2009 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
2010 Preprocessor directives get @code{font-lock-preprocessor-face} if it
2011 exists (i.e., XEmacs). In Emacs they get @code{font-lock-builtin-face}
2012 or @code{font-lock-reference-face}, for lack of a closer equivalent.
2013
2014 @item
2015 @vindex font-lock-warning-face
2016 @vindex c-invalid-face
2017 @vindex invalid-face (c-)
2018 Some kinds of syntactic errors are fontified with
2019 @code{font-lock-warning-face} in Emacs. In older XEmacs versions
2020 there's no corresponding standard face, so there a special
2021 @code{c-invalid-face} is used, which is defined to stand out sharply by
2022 default.
2023
2024 Note that it's not used for @samp{#error} or @samp{#warning} directives,
2025 since those aren't syntactic errors in themselves.
2026 @end itemize
2027
2028
2029 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2030 @node Doc Comments, AWK Mode Font Locking, Faces, Font Locking
2031 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2032 @section Documentation Comments
2033 @cindex documentation comments
2034 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2035
2036 There are various tools to supply documentation in the source as
2037 specially structured comments, e.g., the standard Javadoc tool in Java.
2038 @ccmode{} provides an extensible mechanism to fontify such comments and
2039 the special markup inside them.
2040
2041 @defopt c-doc-comment-style
2042 @vindex doc-comment-style (c-)
2043 This is a style variable that specifies which documentation comment
2044 style to recognize, e.g., @code{javadoc} for Javadoc comments.
2045
2046 The value may also be a list of styles, in which case all of them are
2047 recognized simultaneously (presumably with markup cues that don't
2048 conflict).
2049
2050 The value may also be an association list to specify different comment
2051 styles for different languages. The symbol for the major mode is then
2052 looked up in the alist, and the value of that element is interpreted as
2053 above if found. If it isn't found then the symbol `other' is looked up
2054 and its value is used instead.
2055
2056 The default value for @code{c-doc-comment-style} is
2057 @w{@code{((java-mode . javadoc) (pike-mode . autodoc) (c-mode . gtkdoc))}}.
2058
2059 Note that @ccmode{} uses this variable to set other variables that
2060 handle fontification etc. That's done at mode initialization or when
2061 you switch to a style which sets this variable. Thus, if you change it
2062 in some other way, e.g., interactively in a CC Mode buffer, you will need
2063 to do @kbd{M-x java-mode} (or whatever mode you're currently using) to
2064 reinitialize.
2065
2066 @findex c-setup-doc-comment-style
2067 @findex setup-doc-comment-style (c-)
2068 Note also that when @ccmode{} starts up, the other variables are
2069 modified before the mode hooks are run. If you change this variable in
2070 a mode hook, you'll have to call @code{c-setup-doc-comment-style}
2071 afterwards to redo that work.
2072 @end defopt
2073
2074 @ccmode{} currently provides handing of the following doc comment
2075 styles:
2076
2077 @table @code
2078 @item javadoc
2079 @cindex Javadoc markup
2080 Javadoc comments, the standard tool in Java.
2081
2082 @item autodoc
2083 @cindex Pike autodoc markup
2084 For Pike autodoc markup, the standard in Pike.
2085
2086 @item gtkdoc
2087 @cindex GtkDoc markup
2088 For GtkDoc markup, widely used in the Gnome community.
2089 @end table
2090
2091 The above is by no means complete. If you'd like to see support for
2092 other doc comment styles, please let us know (@pxref{Mailing Lists and
2093 Bug Reports}).
2094
2095 You can also write your own doc comment fontification support to use
2096 with @code{c-doc-comment-style}: Supply a variable or function
2097 @code{*-font-lock-keywords} where @samp{*} is the name you want to use
2098 in @code{c-doc-comment-style}. If it's a variable, it's prepended to
2099 @code{font-lock-keywords}. If it's a function, it's called at mode
2100 initialization and the result is prepended. For an example, see
2101 @code{javadoc-font-lock-keywords} in @file{cc-fonts.el}.
2102
2103 If you add support for another doc comment style, please consider
2104 contributing it: send a note to @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}.
2105
2106
2107 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2108 @node AWK Mode Font Locking, , Doc Comments, Font Locking
2109 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2110 @section AWK Mode Font Locking
2111 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2112
2113 The general appearance of font-locking in AWK mode is much like in any
2114 other programming mode. @xref{Faces For Font Lock,,,elisp, GNU Emacs
2115 Lisp Reference Manual}.
2116
2117 The following faces are, however, used in a non-standard fashion in
2118 AWK mode:
2119
2120 @table @asis
2121 @item @code{font-lock-variable-name-face}
2122 This face was intended for variable declarations. Since variables are
2123 not declared in AWK, this face is used instead for AWK system
2124 variables (such as @code{NF}) and ``Special File Names'' (such as
2125 @code{"/dev/stderr"}).
2126
2127 @item @code{font-lock-builtin-face} (Emacs)/@code{font-lock-preprocessor-face} (XEmacs)
2128 This face is normally used for preprocessor directives in @ccmode{}.
2129 There are no such things in AWK, so this face is used instead for
2130 standard functions (such as @code{match}).
2131
2132 @item @code{font-lock-string-face}
2133 As well as being used for strings, including localizable strings,
2134 (delimited by @samp{"} and @samp{_"}), this face is also used for AWK
2135 regular expressions (delimited by @samp{/}).
2136
2137 @item @code{font-lock-warning-face} (Emacs)/@code{c-invalid-face} (XEmacs)
2138 This face highlights the following syntactically invalid AWK
2139 constructs:
2140
2141 @itemize @bullet
2142 @item
2143 An unterminated string or regular expression. Here the opening
2144 delimiter (@samp{"} or @samp{/} or @samp{_"}) is displayed in
2145 @code{font-lock-warning-face}. This is most noticeable when typing in a
2146 new string/regular expression into a buffer, when the warning-face
2147 serves as a continual reminder to terminate the construct.
2148
2149 AWK mode fontifies unterminated strings/regular expressions
2150 differently from other modes: Only the text up to the end of the line
2151 is fontified as a string (escaped newlines being handled correctly),
2152 rather than the text up to the next string quote.
2153
2154 @item
2155 A space between the function name and opening parenthesis when calling
2156 a user function. The last character of the function name and the
2157 opening parenthesis are highlighted. This font-locking rule will
2158 spuriously highlight a valid concatenation expression where an
2159 identifier precedes a parenthesized expression. Unfortunately.
2160
2161 @item
2162 Whitespace following the @samp{\} in what otherwise looks like an
2163 escaped newline. The @samp{\} is highlighted.
2164 @end itemize
2165 @end table
2166
2167
2168 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2169 @node Config Basics, Custom Filling and Breaking, Font Locking, Top
2170 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2171 @chapter Configuration Basics
2172 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2173
2174 @cindex Emacs Initialization File
2175 @cindex Configuration
2176 You configure @ccmode{} by setting Lisp variables and calling (and
2177 perhaps writing) Lisp functions@footnote{DON'T PANIC!!! This isn't
2178 difficult.}, which is usually done by adding code to an Emacs
2179 initialization file. This file might be @file{site-start.el} or
2180 @file{.emacs} or @file{init.el} or @file{default.el} or perhaps some
2181 other file. @xref{Init File,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}. For
2182 the sake of conciseness, we just call this file ``your @file{.emacs}''
2183 throughout the rest of the manual.
2184
2185 Several of these variables (currently 16), are known collectively as
2186 @dfn{style variables}. @ccmode{} provides a special mechanism, known
2187 as @dfn{styles} to make it easier to set these variables as a group,
2188 to ``inherit'' settings from one style into another, and so on. Style
2189 variables remain ordinary Lisp variables, whose values can be read and
2190 changed independently of the style system. @xref{Style Variables}.
2191
2192 There are several ways you can write the code, depending on the
2193 precise effect you want---they are described further down on this page.
2194 If you are new to @ccmode{}, we suggest you begin with the simplest
2195 method, ``Top-level commands or the customization interface''.
2196
2197 If you make conflicting settings in several of these ways, the way
2198 that takes precedence is the one that appears latest in this list:
2199 @itemize @w{}
2200 @item
2201 @table @asis
2202 @item Style
2203 @itemx File Style@footnote{In earlier versions of @ccmode{}, a File Style setting took precedence over any other setting apart from a File Local Variable setting.}
2204 @itemx Top-level command or ``customization interface''
2205 @itemx Hook
2206 @itemx File Local Variable setting
2207 @end table
2208 @end itemize
2209
2210 Here is a summary of the different ways of writing your configuration
2211 settings:
2212
2213 @table @asis
2214 @item Top-level commands or the ``customization interface''
2215 Most simply, you can write @code{setq} and similar commands at the top
2216 level of your @file{.emacs} file. When you load a @ccmode{} buffer,
2217 it initializes its configuration from these global values (at least,
2218 for those settings you have given values to), so it makes sense to
2219 have these @code{setq} commands run @emph{before} @ccmode{} is first
2220 initialized---in particular, before any call to @code{desktop-read}
2221 (@pxref{Saving Emacs Sessions,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}). For
2222 example, you might set c-basic-offset thus:
2223
2224 @example
2225 (setq c-basic-offset 4)
2226 @end example
2227
2228 You can use the more user friendly Customization interface instead,
2229 but this manual does not cover in detail how that works. To do this,
2230 start by typing @kbd{M-x customize-group @key{RET} c @key{RET}}.
2231 @xref{Easy Customization,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}.
2232 @c The following note really belongs in the Emacs manual.
2233 Emacs normally writes the customizations at the end of your
2234 @file{.emacs} file. If you use @code{desktop-read}, you should edit
2235 your @file{.emacs} to place the call to @code{desktop-read} @emph{after}
2236 the customizations.
2237
2238 The first initialization of @ccmode{} puts a snapshot of the
2239 configuration settings into the special style @code{user}.
2240 @xref{Built-in Styles}.
2241
2242 For basic use of Emacs, either of these ways of configuring is
2243 adequate. However, the settings are then the same in all @ccmode{}
2244 buffers and it can be clumsy to communicate them between programmers.
2245 For more flexibility, you'll want to use one (or both) of @ccmode{}'s
2246 more sophisticated facilities, hooks and styles.
2247
2248 @item Hooks
2249 An Emacs @dfn{hook} is a place to put Lisp functions that you want
2250 Emacs to execute later in specific circumstances.
2251 @xref{Hooks,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}. @ccmode{} supplies a main
2252 hook and a language-specific hook for each language it supports; any
2253 functions you put onto these hooks get executed as the last part of a
2254 buffer's initialization. Typically you put most of your customization
2255 within the main hook, and use the language-specific hooks to vary the
2256 customization settings between language modes. For example, if you
2257 wanted different (non-standard) values of @code{c-basic-offset} in C
2258 Mode and Java Mode buffers, you could do it like this:
2259
2260 @example
2261 @group
2262 (defun my-c-mode-hook ()
2263 (setq c-basic-offset 3))
2264 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'my-c-mode-hook)
2265
2266 (defun my-java-mode-hook ()
2267 (setq c-basic-offset 6))
2268 (add-hook 'java-mode-hook 'my-java-mode-hook)
2269 @end group
2270 @end example
2271
2272 See @ref{CC Hooks} for more details on the use of @ccmode{} hooks.
2273
2274 @item Styles
2275 A @ccmode{} @dfn{style} is a coherent collection of customizations
2276 with a name. At any time, exactly one style is active in each
2277 @ccmode{} buffer, either the one you have selected or a default.
2278 @ccmode{} is delivered with several existing styles. Additionally,
2279 you can create your own styles, possibly based on these existing
2280 styles. If you worked in a programming team called the ``Free
2281 Group'', which had its own coding standards, you might well have this
2282 in your @file{.emacs} file:
2283
2284 @example
2285 (setq c-default-style '((java-mode . "java")
2286 (awk-mode . "awk")
2287 (other . "free-group-style")))
2288 @end example
2289
2290 See @ref{Styles} for fuller details on using @ccmode{} styles and how
2291 to create them.
2292
2293 @item File Local Variable setting
2294 A @dfn{file local variable setting} is a setting which applies to an
2295 individual source file. You put this in a @dfn{local variables list},
2296 a special block at the end of the source file (@pxref{Specifying File
2297 Variables,,,@emacsman{}}).
2298
2299 @item File Styles
2300 A @dfn{file style} is a rarely used variant of the ``style'' mechanism
2301 described above, which applies to an individual source file.
2302 @xref{File Styles}. You use this by setting certain special variables
2303 in a local variables list (@pxref{Specifying File
2304 Variables,,,@emacsman{}}).
2305
2306 @item Hooks with Styles
2307 For ultimate flexibility, you can use hooks and styles together. For
2308 example, if your team were developing a product which required a
2309 Linux driver, you'd probably want to use the ``linux'' style for the
2310 driver, and your own team's style for the rest of the code. You
2311 could achieve this with code like this in your @file{.emacs}:
2312
2313 @example
2314 @group
2315 (defun my-c-mode-hook ()
2316 (c-set-style
2317 (if (and (buffer-file-name)
2318 (string-match "/usr/src/linux" (buffer-file-name)))
2319 "linux"
2320 "free-group-style")))
2321 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'my-c-mode-hook)
2322 @end group
2323 @end example
2324
2325 In a programming team, a hook is a also a good place for each member
2326 to put his own personal preferences. For example, you might be the
2327 only person in your team who likes Auto-newline minor mode. You could
2328 have it enabled by default by placing the following in your
2329 @file{.emacs}:
2330
2331 @example
2332 @group
2333 (defun my-turn-on-auto-newline ()
2334 (c-toggle-auto-newline 1))
2335 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-turn-on-auto-newline)
2336 @end group
2337 @end example
2338 @end table
2339
2340 @menu
2341 * CC Hooks::
2342 * Style Variables::
2343 * Styles::
2344 @end menu
2345
2346 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2347 @node CC Hooks, Style Variables, Config Basics, Config Basics
2348 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2349 @section Hooks
2350 @cindex mode hooks
2351 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2352 @c The node name is "CC Hooks" rather than "Hooks" because of a bug in
2353 @c some older versions of Info, e.g., the info.el in GNU Emacs 21.3.
2354 @c If you go to "Config Basics" and hit <CR> on the xref to "CC
2355 @c Hooks" the function Info-follow-reference searches for "*Note: CC
2356 @c Hooks" from the beginning of the page. If this node were instead
2357 @c named "Hooks", that search would spuriously find "*Note:
2358 @c Hooks(elisp)" and go to the wrong node.
2359
2360 @ccmode{} provides several hooks that you can use to customize the
2361 mode for your coding style. The main hook is
2362 @code{c-mode-common-hook}; typically, you'll put the bulk of your
2363 customizations here. In addition, each language mode has its own
2364 hook, allowing you to fine tune your settings individually for the
2365 different @ccmode{} languages, and there is a package initialization
2366 hook. Finally, there is @code{c-special-indent-hook}, which enables
2367 you to solve anomalous indentation problems. It is described in
2368 @ref{Other Indentation}, not here. All these hooks adhere to the
2369 standard Emacs conventions.
2370
2371 When you open a buffer, @ccmode{} first initializes it with the
2372 currently active style (@pxref{Styles}). Then it calls
2373 @code{c-mode-common-hook}, and finally it calls the language-specific
2374 hook. Thus, any style settings done in these hooks will override
2375 those set by @code{c-default-style}.
2376
2377 @defvar c-initialization-hook
2378 @vindex initialization-hook (c-)
2379 Hook run only once per Emacs session, when @ccmode{} is initialized.
2380 This is a good place to change key bindings (or add new ones) in any
2381 of the @ccmode{} key maps. @xref{Sample .emacs File}.
2382 @end defvar
2383
2384 @defvar c-mode-common-hook
2385 @vindex mode-common-hook (c-)
2386 Common hook across all languages. It's run immediately before the
2387 language specific hook.
2388 @end defvar
2389
2390 @defvar c-mode-hook
2391 @defvarx c++-mode-hook
2392 @defvarx objc-mode-hook
2393 @defvarx java-mode-hook
2394 @defvarx idl-mode-hook
2395 @defvarx pike-mode-hook
2396 @defvarx awk-mode-hook
2397 The language specific mode hooks. The appropriate one is run as the
2398 last thing when you enter that language mode.
2399 @end defvar
2400
2401 Although these hooks are variables defined in @ccmode{}, you can give
2402 them values before @ccmode{}'s code is loaded---indeed, this is the
2403 only way to use @code{c-initialization-hook}. Their values aren't
2404 overwritten when @ccmode{} gets loaded.
2405
2406 Here's a simplified example of what you can add to your @file{.emacs}
2407 file to do things whenever any @ccmode{} language is edited. See the
2408 Emacs manuals for more information on customizing Emacs via hooks.
2409 @xref{Sample .emacs File}, for a more complete sample @file{.emacs}
2410 file.
2411
2412 @example
2413 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
2414 ;; my customizations for all of c-mode and related modes
2415 (no-case-fold-search)
2416 )
2417 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
2418 @end example
2419
2420 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2421 @node Style Variables, Styles, CC Hooks, Config Basics
2422 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2423 @section Style Variables
2424 @cindex styles
2425 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2426
2427 @cindex style variables
2428 The variables that @ccmode{}'s style system control are called
2429 @dfn{style variables}. Note that style variables are ordinary Lisp
2430 variables, which the style system initializes; you can change their
2431 values at any time (e.g., in a hook function). The style system can
2432 also set other variables, to some extent. @xref{Styles}.
2433
2434 @dfn{Style variables} are handled specially in several ways:
2435
2436 @itemize @bullet
2437 @item
2438 Style variables are by default buffer-local variables. However, they
2439 can instead be made global by setting
2440 @code{c-style-variables-are-local-p} to @code{nil} before @ccmode{} is
2441 initialized.
2442
2443 @item
2444 @vindex c-old-style-variable-behavior
2445 @vindex old-style-variable-behavior (c-)
2446 The default global binding of any style variable (with two exceptions
2447 - see below) is the special symbol @code{set-from-style}. When the
2448 style system initializes a buffer-local copy of a style variable for a
2449 @ccmode{} buffer, if its global binding is still that symbol then it
2450 will be set from the current style. Otherwise it will retain its
2451 global default@footnote{This is a big change from versions of
2452 @ccmode{} earlier than 5.26, where such settings would get overridden
2453 by the style system unless special precautions were taken. That was
2454 changed since it was counterintuitive and confusing, especially to
2455 novice users. If your configuration depends on the old overriding
2456 behavior, you can set the variable
2457 @code{c-old-style-variable-behavior} to non-@code{nil}.}. This
2458 ``otherwise'' happens, for example, when you've set the variable with
2459 @code{setq} at the top level of your @file{.emacs} (@pxref{Config
2460 Basics}).
2461
2462 @item
2463 The style variable @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}) is
2464 an association list with an element for each syntactic symbol. It's
2465 handled a little differently from the other style variables. It's
2466 default global binding is the empty list @code{nil}, rather than
2467 @code{set-from-style}. Before the style system is initialized, you
2468 can add individual elements to @code{c-offsets-alist} by calling
2469 @code{c-set-offset}(@pxref{c-offsets-alist}) just like you would set
2470 other style variables with @code{setq}. Those elements will then
2471 prevail when the style system later initializes a buffer-local copy of
2472 @code{c-offsets-alist}.
2473
2474 @item
2475 The style variable @code{c-special-indent-hook} is also handled in a
2476 special way. Styles can only add functions to this hook, not remove
2477 them, so any global settings you put on it are always
2478 preserved@footnote{This did not change in version 5.26.}. The value
2479 you give this variable in a style definition can be either a function
2480 or a list of functions.
2481
2482 @item
2483 The global bindings of the style variables get captured in the special
2484 @code{user} style when the style system is first initialized.
2485 @xref{Built-in Styles}, for details.
2486 @end itemize
2487
2488 The style variables are:@*
2489 @code{c-indent-comment-alist},
2490 @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} (@pxref{Indentation
2491 Commands});@*
2492 @code{c-doc-comment-style} (@pxref{Doc Comments});@*
2493 @code{c-block-comment-prefix}, @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp}
2494 (@pxref{Custom Filling and Breaking});@*
2495 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist} (@pxref{Hanging Braces});@*
2496 @code{c-hanging-colons-alist} (@pxref{Hanging Colons});@*
2497 @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} (@pxref{Hanging Semicolons and
2498 Commas});@*
2499 @code{c-cleanup-list} (@pxref{Clean-ups});@*
2500 @code{c-basic-offset} (@pxref{Customizing Indentation});@*
2501 @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist});@*
2502 @code{c-comment-only-line-offset} (@pxref{Comment Line-Up});@*
2503 @code{c-special-indent-hook}, @code{c-label-minimum-indentation}
2504 (@pxref{Other Indentation});@*
2505 @code{c-backslash-column}, @code{c-backslash-max-column}
2506 (@pxref{Custom Macros}).
2507
2508 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2509 @node Styles, , Style Variables, Config Basics
2510 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2511 @section Styles
2512 @cindex styles
2513 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2514
2515 By @dfn{style} we mean the layout of the code---things like how many
2516 columns to indent a block of code, whether an opening brace gets
2517 indented to the level of the code it encloses, or of the construct
2518 that introduces it, or ``hangs'' at the end of a line.
2519
2520 Most people only need to edit code formatted in just a few well-defined
2521 and consistent styles. For example, their organization might impose a
2522 ``blessed'' style that all its programmers must conform to. Similarly,
2523 people who work on GNU software will have to use the GNU coding style.
2524 Some shops are more lenient, allowing a variety of coding styles, and as
2525 programmers come and go, there could be a number of styles in use. For
2526 this reason, @ccmode{} makes it convenient for you to set up logical
2527 groupings of customizations called @dfn{styles}, associate a single name
2528 for any particular style, and pretty easily start editing new or
2529 existing code using these styles.
2530
2531 As an alternative to writing a style definition yourself, you can have
2532 @ccmode{} @dfn{guess} (at least part of) your style by looking at an
2533 already formatted piece of your code, @ref{Guessing the Style}.
2534
2535 @menu
2536 * Built-in Styles::
2537 * Choosing a Style::
2538 * Adding Styles::
2539 * Guessing the Style::
2540 * File Styles::
2541 @end menu
2542
2543 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2544 @node Built-in Styles, Choosing a Style, Styles, Styles
2545 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2546 @subsection Built-in Styles
2547 @cindex styles, built-in
2548 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2549
2550 If you're lucky, one of @ccmode{}'s built-in styles might be just
2551 what you're looking for. These are:
2552
2553 @table @code
2554 @item gnu
2555 @cindex GNU style
2556 Coding style blessed by the Free Software Foundation
2557 for C code in GNU programs.
2558
2559 @item k&r
2560 @cindex K&R style
2561 The classic Kernighan and Ritchie style for C code.
2562
2563 @item bsd
2564 @cindex BSD style
2565 Also known as ``Allman style'' after Eric Allman.
2566
2567 @item whitesmith
2568 @cindex Whitesmith style
2569 Popularized by the examples that came with Whitesmiths C, an early
2570 commercial C compiler.
2571
2572 @item stroustrup
2573 @cindex Stroustrup style
2574 The classic Stroustrup style for C++ code.
2575
2576 @item ellemtel
2577 @cindex Ellemtel style
2578 Popular C++ coding standards as defined by ``Programming in C++, Rules
2579 and Recommendations,'' Erik Nyquist and Mats Henricson,
2580 Ellemtel@footnote{This document is available at
2581 @uref{http://www.doc.ic.ac.uk/lab/cplus/c++.rules/} among other
2582 places.}.
2583 @c N.B. This URL was still valid at 2005/8/28 (ACM).
2584
2585 @item linux
2586 @cindex Linux style
2587 C coding standard for Linux (the kernel).
2588
2589 @item python
2590 @cindex Python style
2591 C coding standard for Python extension modules@footnote{Python is a
2592 high level scripting language with a C/C++ foreign function interface.
2593 For more information, see @uref{http://www.python.org/}.}.
2594
2595 @item java
2596 @cindex Java style
2597 The style for editing Java code. Note that the default
2598 value for @code{c-default-style} installs this style when you enter
2599 @code{java-mode}.
2600
2601 @item awk
2602 @cindex AWK style
2603 The style for editing AWK code. Note that the default value for
2604 @code{c-default-style} installs this style when you enter
2605 @code{awk-mode}.
2606
2607 @item user
2608 @cindex User style
2609 This is a special style created by you. It consists of the factory
2610 defaults for all the style variables as modified by the customizations
2611 you do either with the Customization interface or by writing
2612 @code{setq}s and @code{c-set-offset}s at the top level of your
2613 @file{.emacs} file (@pxref{Config Basics}). The style system creates
2614 this style as part of its initialization and doesn't modify it
2615 afterwards.
2616 @end table
2617
2618
2619 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2620 @node Choosing a Style, Adding Styles, Built-in Styles, Styles
2621 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2622 @subsection Choosing a Style
2623 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2624
2625 When you create a new buffer, its style will be set from
2626 @code{c-default-style}. The factory default is the style @code{gnu},
2627 except in Java and AWK modes where it's @code{java} and @code{awk}.
2628
2629 Remember that if you set a style variable with the Customization
2630 interface or at the top level of your @file{.emacs} file before the
2631 style system is initialized (@pxref{Config Basics}), this setting will
2632 override the one that the style system would have given the variable.
2633
2634 To set a buffer's style interactively, use the command @kbd{C-c .}
2635 (@pxref{Other Commands}). To set it from a file's local variable
2636 list, @ref{File Styles}.
2637
2638 @defopt c-default-style
2639 @vindex default-style (c-)
2640 This variable specifies which style to install by default in new
2641 buffers. It takes either a style name string, or an association list
2642 of major mode symbols to style names:
2643
2644 @enumerate
2645 @item
2646 When @code{c-default-style} is a string, it must be an existing style
2647 name. This style is then used for all modes.
2648
2649 @item
2650 When @code{c-default-style} is an association list, the mode language
2651 is looked up to find a style name string.
2652
2653 @item
2654 If @code{c-default-style} is an association list where the mode
2655 language mode isn't found then the special symbol @samp{other} is
2656 looked up. If it's found then the associated style is used.
2657
2658 @item
2659 If @samp{other} is not found then the @samp{gnu} style is used.
2660 @end enumerate
2661
2662 In all cases, the style described in @code{c-default-style} is installed
2663 @emph{before} the language hooks are run, so you can always override
2664 this setting by including an explicit call to @code{c-set-style} in your
2665 language mode hook, or in @code{c-mode-common-hook}.
2666
2667 The standard value of @code{c-default-style} is @w{@code{((java-mode
2668 . "java") (awk-mode . "awk") (other . "gnu"))}}.
2669 @end defopt
2670
2671 @defvar c-indentation-style
2672 @vindex indentation-style (c-)
2673 This variable always contains the buffer's current style name, as a
2674 string.
2675 @end defvar
2676
2677 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2678 @node Adding Styles, Guessing the Style, Choosing a Style, Styles
2679 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2680 @subsection Adding and Amending Styles
2681 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2682
2683 If none of the built-in styles is appropriate, you'll probably want to
2684 create a new @dfn{style definition}, possibly based on an existing
2685 style. To do this, put the new style's settings into a list with the
2686 following format; the list can then be passed as an argument to the
2687 function @code{c-add-style}. You can see an example of a style
2688 definition in @ref{Sample .emacs File}.
2689
2690 @cindex style definition
2691 @c @defvr {List} style definition
2692 @table @asis
2693 @item Structure of a Style Definition List
2694 ([@var{base-style}] [(@var{variable} . @var{value}) @dots{}])
2695
2696 Optional @var{base-style}, if present, must be a string which is the
2697 name of the @dfn{base style} from which this style inherits. At most
2698 one @var{base-style} is allowed in a style definition. If
2699 @var{base-style} is not specified, the style inherits from the table
2700 of factory default values@footnote{This table is stored internally in
2701 the variable c-fallback-style.} instead. All styles eventually
2702 inherit from this internal table. Style loops generate errors. The
2703 list of pre-existing styles can be seen in @ref{Built-in Styles}.
2704
2705 The dotted pairs (@var{variable} . @var{value}) each consist of a
2706 variable and the value it is to be set to when the style is later
2707 activated.@footnote{Note that if the variable has been given a value
2708 by the Customization interface or a @code{setq} at the top level of
2709 your @file{.emacs}, this value will override the one the style system
2710 tries to give it. @xref{Config Basics}.} The variable can be either a
2711 @ccmode{} style variable or an arbitrary Emacs variable. In the
2712 latter case, it is @emph{not} made buffer-local by the @ccmode{} style
2713 system.
2714 @c @end defvr
2715
2716 Two variables are treated specially in the dotted pair list:
2717
2718 @table @code
2719 @item c-offsets-alist
2720 The value is in turn a list of dotted pairs of the form
2721
2722 @example
2723 (@r{@var{syntactic-symbol}} . @r{@var{offset}})
2724 @end example
2725
2726 as described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. These are passed to
2727 @code{c-set-offset} so there is no need to set every syntactic symbol
2728 in your style, only those that are different from the inherited style.
2729
2730 @item c-special-indent-hook
2731 The value is added to @code{c-special-indent-hook} using
2732 @code{add-hook}, so any functions already on it are kept. If the value
2733 is a list, each element of the list is added with @code{add-hook}.
2734 @end table
2735 @end table
2736
2737 Styles are kept in the @code{c-style-alist} variable, but you
2738 should never modify this variable directly. Instead, @ccmode{}
2739 provides the function @code{c-add-style} for this purpose.
2740
2741 @defun c-add-style stylename description &optional set-p
2742 @findex add-style (c-)
2743 Add or update a style called @var{stylename}, a string.
2744 @var{description} is the new style definition in the form described
2745 above. If @var{stylename} already exists in @code{c-style-alist} then
2746 it is replaced by @var{description}. (Note, this replacement is
2747 total. The old style is @emph{not} merged into the new one.)
2748 Otherwise, a new style is added.
2749
2750 If the optional @var{set-p} is non-@code{nil} then the new style is
2751 applied to the current buffer as well. The use of this facility is
2752 deprecated and it might be removed from @ccmode{} in a future release.
2753 You should use @code{c-set-style} instead.
2754
2755 The sample @file{.emacs} file provides a concrete example of how a new
2756 style can be added and automatically set. @xref{Sample .emacs File}.
2757 @end defun
2758
2759 @defvar c-style-alist
2760 @vindex style-alist (c-)
2761 This is the variable that holds the definitions for the styles. It
2762 should not be changed directly; use @code{c-add-style} instead.
2763 @end defvar
2764
2765 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2766 @node Guessing the Style, File Styles, Adding Styles, Styles
2767 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2768 @subsection Guessing the Style
2769 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2770
2771 Instead of specifying a style, you can get @ccmode{} to @dfn{guess}
2772 your style by examining an already formatted code buffer. @ccmode{}
2773 then determines the ''most frequent'' offset (@pxref{c-offsets-alist})
2774 for each of the syntactic symbols (@pxref{Indentation Engine Basics})
2775 encountered in the buffer, and the ''most frequent'' value of
2776 c-basic-offset (@pxref{Customizing Indentation}), then merges the
2777 current style with these ''guesses'' to form a new style. This
2778 combined style is known as the @dfn{guessed style}.
2779
2780 To do this, call @code{c-guess} (or one of the other 5 guessing
2781 commands) on your sample buffer. The analysis of your code may take
2782 some time.
2783
2784 You can then set the guessed style in any @ccmode{} buffer with
2785 @code{c-guess-install}. You can display the style with
2786 @code{c-guess-view}, and preserve it by copying it into your
2787 @file{.emacs} for future use, preferably after editing it.
2788
2789 @table @asis
2790 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess-no-install}
2791 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-buffer-no-install}
2792 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-region-no-install}
2793 @findex c-guess-no-install
2794 @findex c-guess-buffer-no-install
2795 @findex c-guess-region-no-install
2796 @findex guess-no-install (c-)
2797 @findex guess-buffer-no-install (c-)
2798 @findex guess-region-no-install (c-)
2799 These commands analyze a part of the current buffer and guess the
2800 style from it.
2801
2802 The part of the buffer examined is either the region
2803 (@code{c-guess-region-no-install}), the entire buffer
2804 (@code{c-guess-buffer-no-install}), or the first
2805 @code{c-guess-region-max} bytes (@code{c-guess-no-install}).
2806
2807 Each of these commands can be given an optional prefix argument. This
2808 instructs @ccmode{} to combine the new guesses with the current
2809 guesses before forming the guessed style.
2810 @end table
2811
2812 @table @asis
2813 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess}
2814 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-buffer}
2815 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-region}
2816 @findex c-guess
2817 @findex c-guess-buffer
2818 @findex c-guess-region
2819 @findex guess (c-)
2820 @findex guess-buffer (c-)
2821 @findex guess-region (c-)
2822 These commands analyze a part of the current buffer, guess the style
2823 from it, then install the guessed style on the buffer. The guessed
2824 style is given a name based on the buffer's absolute file name, and
2825 you can then set this style on any @ccmode{} buffer with @kbd{C-c .}.
2826
2827 The part of the buffer examined is either the region
2828 (@code{c-guess-region}), the entire buffer (@code{c-guess-buffer}), or
2829 the first @code{c-guess-region-max} bytes (@code{c-guess}).
2830
2831 Each of these commands can be given an optional prefix argument. This
2832 instructs @ccmode{} to combine the new guesses with the current
2833 guesses before forming the guessed style.
2834 @end table
2835
2836 @defopt c-guess-region-max
2837 @vindex guess-region-max (c-)
2838 This variable, default 50000, is the size in bytes of the buffer
2839 portion examined by c-guess and c-guess-no-install. If set to
2840 @code{nil}, the entire buffer is examined.
2841 @end defopt
2842
2843 @defopt c-guess-offset-threshold
2844 @vindex guess-offset-threshold (c-)
2845 This variable, default 10, is the maximum offset, either outwards or
2846 inwards, which will be taken into account by the analysis process.
2847 Any offset bigger than this will be ignored. For no limit, set this
2848 variable to a large number.
2849 @end defopt
2850
2851 @table @asis
2852 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess-install}
2853 @findex c-guess-install
2854 @findex guess-install (c-)
2855
2856 Set the current buffer's style to the guessed style. This prompts you
2857 to enter an optional new style name to give to the guessed style. By
2858 default, this name is based on the buffer's absolute file name. You
2859 can then use this style like any other.
2860
2861 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess-view}
2862 @findex c-guess-view
2863 @findex guess-view (c-)
2864 Display the most recently guessed style in a temporary buffer. This
2865 display is in the form of a @code{c-add-style} form (@pxref{Adding
2866 Styles}) which can be easily copied to your @file{.emacs}. You will
2867 probably want to edit it first.
2868
2869 The display of the guessed style contains these elements:
2870
2871 @table @asis
2872 @item Placeholder Name
2873 You should replace this with a style name of your own.
2874 @item Parent Style
2875 The style current when the guessing began, from which the guessed
2876 style inherits (@pxref{Config Basics}) the settings which weren't
2877 guessed.
2878 @item Guessed Offsets
2879 These are the core result of the guessing process. Each of them is
2880 marked by a comment.
2881 @item Inherited Offsets
2882 These are syntactic offsets which have been taken over from the parent
2883 style. To avoid possible future conflicts, you should remove either
2884 these offsets or the parent style name.
2885 @end table
2886 @end table
2887
2888 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2889 @node File Styles, , Guessing the Style, Styles
2890 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2891 @subsection File Styles
2892 @cindex styles, file local
2893 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2894
2895 @cindex file local variables
2896
2897 The Emacs manual describes how you can customize certain variables on a
2898 per-file basis by including a @dfn{file local variable} block at the end
2899 of the file (@pxref{File Variables,, Local Variables in Files,@emacsman{},
2900 @emacsmantitle{}}).
2901
2902 So far, you've only seen a functional interface for setting styles in
2903 @ccmode{}, and this can't be used here. @ccmode{} fills the gap by
2904 providing two variables for use in a file's local variable list.
2905 Don't use them anywhere else! These allow you to customize the style
2906 on a per-file basis:
2907
2908 @defvar c-file-style
2909 @vindex file-style (c-)
2910 Set this variable to a style name string in the Local Variables list.
2911 From now on, when you visit the file, @ccmode{} will automatically set
2912 the file's style to this one using @code{c-set-style}.
2913 @end defvar
2914
2915 @defvar c-file-offsets
2916 @vindex file-offsets (c-)
2917 Set this variable (in the Local Variables list) to an association list
2918 of the same format as @code{c-offsets-alist}. From now on, when you
2919 visit the file, @ccmode{} will automatically institute these offsets
2920 using @code{c-set-offset}.
2921 @end defvar
2922
2923 Note that file style settings (i.e., @code{c-file-style}) are applied
2924 before file offset settings
2925 (i.e., @code{c-file-offsets})@footnote{Also, if either of these are set
2926 in a file's local variable section, all the style variable values are
2927 made local to that buffer, even if
2928 @code{c-style-variables-are-local-p} is @code{nil}. Since this
2929 variable is virtually always non-@code{nil} anyhow, you're unlikely to
2930 notice this effect.}.
2931
2932 If you set any variable by the file local variables mechanism, that
2933 setting takes priority over all other settings, even those in your
2934 mode hooks (@pxref{CC Hooks}). Any individual setting of a variable
2935 will override one made through @code{c-file-style} or
2936 @code{c-file-offsets}.
2937 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2938 @node Custom Filling and Breaking, Custom Auto-newlines, Config Basics, Top
2939 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2940 @chapter Customizing Filling and Line Breaking
2941 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2942
2943 Since there's a lot of normal text in comments and string literals,
2944 @ccmode{} provides features to edit these like in text mode. It does
2945 this by hooking in on the different line breaking functions and tuning
2946 relevant variables as necessary.
2947
2948 @vindex c-comment-prefix-regexp
2949 @vindex comment-prefix-regexp (c-)
2950 @cindex comment line prefix
2951 @vindex comment-start
2952 @vindex comment-end
2953 @vindex comment-start-skip
2954 @vindex paragraph-start
2955 @vindex paragraph-separate
2956 @vindex paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix
2957 @vindex adaptive-fill-mode
2958 @vindex adaptive-fill-regexp
2959 @vindex adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp
2960 To make Emacs recognize comments and treat text in them as normal
2961 paragraphs, @ccmode{} makes several standard
2962 variables@footnote{@code{comment-start}, @code{comment-end},
2963 @code{comment-start-skip}, @code{paragraph-start},
2964 @code{paragraph-separate}, @code{paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix},
2965 @code{adaptive-fill-mode}, @code{adaptive-fill-regexp}, and
2966 @code{adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp}.} buffer-local and modifies them
2967 according to the language syntax and the comment line prefix.
2968
2969 @defopt c-comment-prefix-regexp
2970 @vindex comment-prefix-regexp (c-)
2971 This style variable contains the regexp used to recognize the
2972 @dfn{comment line prefix}, which is the line decoration that starts
2973 every line in a comment. The variable is either the comment line
2974 prefix itself, or (more usually) an association list with different
2975 values for different languages. The symbol for the major mode is
2976 looked up in the alist to get the regexp for the language, and if it
2977 isn't found then the special symbol @samp{other} is looked up instead.
2978
2979 When a comment line gets divided by @kbd{M-j} or the like, @ccmode{}
2980 inserts the comment line prefix from a neighboring line at the start
2981 of the new line. The default value of c-comment-prefix-regexp is
2982 @samp{//+\\|\\**}, which matches C++ style line comments like
2983
2984 @example
2985 // blah blah
2986 @end example
2987
2988 @noindent
2989 with two or more slashes in front of them, and the second and
2990 subsequent lines of C style block comments like
2991
2992 @example
2993 @group
2994 /*
2995 * blah blah
2996 */
2997 @end group
2998 @end example
2999
3000 @noindent
3001 with zero or more stars at the beginning of every line. If you change
3002 this variable, please make sure it still matches the comment starter
3003 (i.e., @code{//}) of line comments @emph{and} the line prefix inside
3004 block comments.
3005
3006 @findex c-setup-paragraph-variables
3007 @findex setup-paragraph-variables (c-)
3008 Also note that since @ccmode{} uses the value of
3009 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} to set up several other variables at
3010 mode initialization, there won't be any effect if you just change it
3011 inside a @ccmode{} buffer. You need to call the command
3012 @code{c-setup-paragraph-variables} too, to update those other
3013 variables. That's also the case if you modify
3014 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} in a mode hook, since @ccmode{} will
3015 already have set up these variables before calling the hook.
3016 @end defopt
3017
3018 In comments, @ccmode{} uses @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} to adapt
3019 the line prefix from the other lines in the comment.
3020
3021 @vindex adaptive-fill-mode
3022 @cindex Adaptive Fill mode
3023 @ccmode{} uses adaptive fill mode (@pxref{Adaptive Fill,,, emacs, GNU
3024 Emacs Manual}) to make Emacs correctly keep the line prefix when
3025 filling paragraphs. That also makes Emacs preserve the text
3026 indentation @emph{inside} the comment line prefix. E.g., in the
3027 following comment, both paragraphs will be filled with the left
3028 margins of the texts kept intact:
3029
3030 @example
3031 @group
3032 /* Make a balanced b-tree of the nodes in the incoming
3033 * stream. But, to quote the famous words of Donald E.
3034 * Knuth,
3035 *
3036 * Beware of bugs in the above code; I have only
3037 * proved it correct, not tried it.
3038 */
3039 @end group
3040 @end example
3041
3042 @findex c-setup-filladapt
3043 @findex setup-filladapt (c-)
3044 @findex filladapt-mode
3045 @vindex filladapt-mode
3046 @cindex Filladapt mode
3047 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages, notably Kyle
3048 E. Jones' Filladapt package@footnote{It's available from
3049 @uref{http://www.wonderworks.com/}. As of version 2.12, it does however
3050 lack a feature that makes it work suboptimally when
3051 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} matches the empty string (which it does
3052 by default). A patch for that is available from
3053 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/,, the CC Mode web site}.},
3054 @c 2005/11/22: The above is still believed to be the case.
3055 which handles things like bulleted lists nicely. There's a convenience
3056 function @code{c-setup-filladapt} that tunes the relevant variables in
3057 Filladapt for use in @ccmode{}. Call it from a mode hook, e.g., with
3058 something like this in your @file{.emacs}:
3059
3060 @example
3061 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
3062 (c-setup-filladapt)
3063 (filladapt-mode 1))
3064 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
3065 @end example
3066
3067 @defopt c-block-comment-prefix
3068 @vindex block-comment-prefix (c-)
3069 @vindex c-comment-continuation-stars
3070 @vindex comment-continuation-stars (c-)
3071 Normally the comment line prefix inserted for a new line inside a
3072 comment is deduced from other lines in it. However there's one
3073 situation when there's no hint about what the prefix should look like,
3074 namely when a block comment is broken for the first time. This style
3075 variable@footnote{In versions before 5.26, this variable was called
3076 @code{c-comment-continuation-stars}. As a compatibility measure,
3077 @ccmode{} still uses the value on that variable if it's set.} is used
3078 then as the comment prefix. It defaults to @samp{*
3079 }@footnote{Actually, this default setting of
3080 @code{c-block-comment-prefix} typically gets overridden by the default
3081 style @code{gnu}, which sets it to blank. You can see the line
3082 splitting effect described here by setting a different style,
3083 e.g., @code{k&r} @xref{Choosing a Style}.}, which makes a comment
3084
3085 @example
3086 /* Got O(n^2) here, which is a Bad Thing. */
3087 @end example
3088
3089 @noindent
3090 break into
3091
3092 @example
3093 @group
3094 /* Got O(n^2) here, which
3095 * is a Bad Thing. */
3096 @end group
3097 @end example
3098
3099 Note that it won't work to adjust the indentation by putting leading
3100 spaces in @code{c-block-comment-prefix}, since @ccmode{} still uses the
3101 normal indentation engine to indent the line. Thus, the right way to
3102 fix the indentation is by customizing the @code{c} syntactic symbol. It
3103 defaults to @code{c-lineup-C-comments}, which handles the indentation of
3104 most common comment styles, see @ref{Line-Up Functions}.
3105 @end defopt
3106
3107 @defopt c-ignore-auto-fill
3108 @vindex ignore-auto-fill (c-)
3109 When auto fill mode is enabled, @ccmode{} can selectively ignore it
3110 depending on the context the line break would occur in, e.g., to never
3111 break a line automatically inside a string literal. This variable
3112 takes a list of symbols for the different contexts where auto-filling
3113 never should occur:
3114
3115 @table @code
3116 @item string
3117 Inside a string or character literal.
3118 @item c
3119 Inside a C style block comment.
3120 @item c++
3121 Inside a C++ style line comment.
3122 @item cpp
3123 Inside a preprocessor directive.
3124 @item code
3125 Anywhere else, i.e., in normal code.
3126 @end table
3127
3128 By default, @code{c-ignore-auto-fill} is set to @code{(string cpp
3129 code)}, which means that when auto-fill mode is activated,
3130 auto-filling only occurs in comments. In literals, it's often
3131 desirable to have explicit control over newlines. In preprocessor
3132 directives, the necessary @samp{\} escape character before the newline
3133 is not automatically inserted, so an automatic line break would
3134 produce invalid code. In normal code, line breaks are normally
3135 dictated by some logical structure in the code rather than the last
3136 whitespace character, so automatic line breaks there will produce poor
3137 results in the current implementation.
3138 @end defopt
3139
3140 @vindex comment-multi-line
3141 If inside a comment and @code{comment-multi-line} (@pxref{Auto
3142 Fill,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}} is non-@code{nil}, the
3143 indentation and
3144 line prefix are preserved. If inside a comment and
3145 @code{comment-multi-line} is @code{nil}, a new comment of the same
3146 type is started on the next line and indented as appropriate for
3147 comments.
3148
3149 Note that @ccmode{} sets @code{comment-multi-line} to @code{t} at
3150 startup. The reason is that @kbd{M-j} could otherwise produce sequences
3151 of single line block comments for texts that should logically be treated
3152 as one comment, and the rest of the paragraph handling code
3153 (e.g., @kbd{M-q} and @kbd{M-a}) can't cope with that, which would lead to
3154 inconsistent behavior.
3155
3156 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3157 @node Custom Auto-newlines, Clean-ups, Custom Filling and Breaking, Top
3158 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3159 @chapter Customizing Auto-newlines
3160 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3161
3162 @ccmode{} determines whether to insert auto-newlines in two basically
3163 different ways, depending on the character just typed:
3164
3165 @table @asis
3166 @item Braces and Colons
3167 @ccmode{} first determines the syntactic context of the brace or colon
3168 (@pxref{Syntactic Symbols}), then looks for a corresponding element in
3169 an alist. This element specifies where to put newlines: this is any
3170 combination of before and after the brace or colon. If no alist
3171 element is found, newlines are inserted both before and after a brace,
3172 but none are inserted around a colon. See @ref{Hanging Braces} and
3173 @ref{Hanging Colons}.
3174
3175 @item Semicolons and Commas
3176 The variable @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} contains a list of
3177 functions which determine whether to insert a newline after a newly
3178 typed semicolon or comma. @xref{Hanging Semicolons and Commas}.
3179 @end table
3180
3181 The names of these configuration variables contain @samp{hanging}
3182 because they let you @dfn{hang} the pertinent characters. A character
3183 which introduces a C construct is said to @dfn{hang on the right} when
3184 it appears at the end of a line after other code, being separated by a
3185 line break from the construct it introduces, like the opening brace in:
3186
3187 @example
3188 @group
3189 while (i < MAX) @{
3190 total += entry[i];
3191 entry [i++] = 0;
3192 @}
3193 @end group
3194 @end example
3195
3196 @noindent
3197 A character @dfn{hangs on the left} when it appears at the start of
3198 the line after the construct it closes off, like the above closing
3199 brace.
3200
3201 The next chapter, ``Clean-ups'', describes how to configure @ccmode{}
3202 to remove these automatically added newlines in certain specific
3203 circumstances. @xref{Clean-ups}.
3204
3205 @menu
3206 * Hanging Braces::
3207 * Hanging Colons::
3208 * Hanging Semicolons and Commas::
3209 @end menu
3210
3211
3212 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3213 @node Hanging Braces, Hanging Colons, Custom Auto-newlines, Custom Auto-newlines
3214 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3215 @section Hanging Braces
3216 @cindex hanging braces
3217 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3218
3219 To specify which kinds of braces you want auto-newlines put around,
3220 you set the style variable @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}. Its
3221 structure and semantics are described in this section. Details of how
3222 to set it up, and its relationship to CC Mode's style system are given
3223 in @ref{Style Variables}.
3224
3225 Say you wanted an auto-newline after (but not before) the following
3226 @samp{@{}:
3227
3228 @example
3229 if (foo < 17) @{
3230 @end example
3231
3232 @noindent
3233 First you need to find the @dfn{syntactic context} of the brace---type
3234 a @key{RET} before the brace to get it on a line of its
3235 own@footnote{Also insert a @samp{\} at the end of the previous line if
3236 you're in AWK Mode.}, then type @kbd{C-c C-s}. That will tell you
3237 something like:
3238
3239 @example
3240 ((substatement-open 1061))
3241 @end example
3242
3243 @noindent
3244 So here you need to put the entry @code{(substatement-open . (after))}
3245 into @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}.
3246
3247 If you don't want any auto-newlines for a particular syntactic symbol,
3248 put this into @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}:
3249
3250 @example
3251 (brace-entry-open)
3252 @end example
3253
3254 If some brace syntactic symbol is not in @code{c-hanging-brace-alist},
3255 its entry is taken by default as @code{(before after)}---insert a
3256 newline both before and after the brace. In place of a
3257 ``before/after'' list you can specify a function in this alist---this
3258 is useful when the auto newlines depend on the code around the brace.
3259
3260 @defopt c-hanging-braces-alist
3261 @vindex hanging-braces-alist (c-)
3262
3263 This variable is an association list which maps syntactic symbols to
3264 lists of places to insert a newline. @xref{Association
3265 Lists,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}. The key of each element is the
3266 syntactic symbol, the associated value is either @code{nil}, a list,
3267 or a function.
3268
3269 @table @asis
3270 @item The Key: the syntactic symbol
3271 The syntactic symbols that are useful as keys in this list are
3272 @code{brace-list-intro}, @code{statement-cont},
3273 @code{inexpr-class-open}, @code{inexpr-class-close}, and all the
3274 @code{*-open} and @code{*-close} symbols. @xref{Syntactic Symbols},
3275 for a more detailed description of these syntactic symbols, except for
3276 @code{inexpr-class-open} and @code{inexpr-class-close}, which aren't
3277 actual syntactic symbols. Elements with any other value as a key get
3278 ignored.
3279
3280 The braces of anonymous inner classes in Java are given the special
3281 symbols @code{inexpr-class-open} and @code{inexpr-class-close}, so that
3282 they can be distinguished from the braces of normal classes@footnote{The
3283 braces of anonymous classes produce a combination of
3284 @code{inexpr-class}, and @code{class-open} or @code{class-close} in
3285 normal indentation analysis.}.
3286
3287 Note that the aggregate constructs in Pike mode, @samp{(@{}, @samp{@})},
3288 @samp{([}, @samp{])}, and @samp{(<}, @samp{>)}, do not count as brace
3289 lists in this regard, even though they do for normal indentation
3290 purposes. It's currently not possible to set automatic newlines on
3291 these constructs.
3292
3293 @item The associated value: the ``ACTION'' list or function
3294 The value associated with each syntactic symbol in this association
3295 list is called an @var{action}, which can be either a list or a
3296 function which returns a list. @xref{Custom Braces}, for how to use
3297 a function as a brace hanging @var{action}.
3298
3299 The list @var{action} (or the list returned by @var{action} when it's
3300 a function) contains some combination of the symbols @code{before} and
3301 @code{after}, directing @ccmode{} where to put newlines in
3302 relationship to the brace being inserted. Thus, if the list contains
3303 only the symbol @code{after}, then the brace hangs on the right side
3304 of the line, as in:
3305
3306 @example
3307 // here, open braces always `hang'
3308 void spam( int i ) @{
3309 if( i == 7 ) @{
3310 dosomething(i);
3311 @}
3312 @}
3313 @end example
3314
3315 When the list contains both @code{after} and @code{before}, the braces
3316 will appear on a line by themselves, as shown by the close braces in
3317 the above example. The list can also be empty, in which case newlines
3318 are added neither before nor after the brace.
3319 @end table
3320
3321 If a syntactic symbol is missing entirely from
3322 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}, it's treated in the same way as an
3323 @var{action} with a list containing @code{before} and @code{after}, so
3324 that braces by default end up on their own line.
3325
3326 For example, the default value of @code{c-hanging-braces-alist} is:
3327
3328 @example
3329 ((brace-list-open)
3330 (brace-entry-open)
3331 (statement-cont)
3332 (substatement-open after)
3333 (block-close . c-snug-do-while)
3334 (extern-lang-open after)
3335 (namespace-open after)
3336 (module-open after)
3337 (composition-open after)
3338 (inexpr-class-open after)
3339 (inexpr-class-close before))
3340 @end example
3341
3342 @noindent which says that @code{brace-list-open},
3343 @code{brace-entry-open} and @code{statement-cont}@footnote{Brace lists
3344 inside statements, such as initializers for static array variables
3345 inside functions in C, are recognized as @code{statement-cont}. All
3346 normal substatement blocks are recognized with other symbols.} braces
3347 should both hang on the right side and allow subsequent text to follow
3348 on the same line as the brace. Also, @code{substatement-open},
3349 @code{extern-lang-open}, and @code{inexpr-class-open} braces should hang
3350 on the right side, but subsequent text should follow on the next line.
3351 The opposite holds for @code{inexpr-class-close} braces; they won't
3352 hang, but the following text continues on the same line. Here, in the
3353 @code{block-close} entry, you also see an example of using a function as
3354 an @var{action}. In all other cases, braces are put on a line by
3355 themselves.
3356 @end defopt
3357
3358 @menu
3359 * Custom Braces::
3360 @end menu
3361
3362 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3363 @node Custom Braces, , Hanging Braces, Hanging Braces
3364 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3365 @subsection Custom Brace Hanging
3366 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3367
3368 @vindex c-hanging-braces-alist
3369 @vindex hanging-braces-alist (c-)
3370 @cindex action functions
3371 Syntactic symbols aren't the only place where you can customize
3372 @ccmode{} with the lisp equivalent of callback functions. Remember
3373 that @var{action}s are usually a list containing some combination of
3374 the symbols @code{before} and @code{after} (@pxref{Hanging Braces}).
3375 For more flexibility, you can instead specify brace ``hanginess'' by
3376 giving a syntactic symbol an @dfn{action function} in
3377 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}; this function determines the
3378 ``hanginess'' of a brace, usually by looking at the code near it.
3379
3380 @cindex customization, brace hanging
3381 An action function is called with two arguments: the syntactic symbol
3382 for the brace (e.g., @code{substatement-open}), and the buffer position
3383 where the brace has been inserted. Point is undefined on entry to an
3384 action function, but the function must preserve it (e.g., by using
3385 @code{save-excursion}). The return value should be a list containing
3386 some combination of @code{before} and @code{after}, including neither
3387 of them (i.e., @code{nil}).
3388
3389 @defvar c-syntactic-context
3390 @vindex syntactic-context (c-)
3391 During the call to the indentation or brace hanging @var{action}
3392 function, this variable is bound to the full syntactic analysis list.
3393 This might be, for example, @samp{((block-close 73))}. Don't ever
3394 give @code{c-syntactic-context} a value yourself---this would disrupt
3395 the proper functioning of @ccmode{}.
3396
3397 This variable is also bound in three other circumstances:
3398 (i)@w{ }when calling a c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria function
3399 (@pxref{Hanging Semicolons and Commas}); (ii)@w{ }when calling a
3400 line-up function (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}); (iii)@w{ }when calling a
3401 c-special-indent-hook function (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
3402 @end defvar
3403
3404 As an example, @ccmode{} itself uses this feature to dynamically
3405 determine the hanginess of braces which close ``do-while''
3406 constructs:
3407
3408 @example
3409 void do_list( int count, char** atleast_one_string )
3410 @{
3411 int i=0;
3412 do @{
3413 handle_string( atleast_one_string[i] );
3414 i++;
3415 @} while( i < count );
3416 @}
3417 @end example
3418
3419 @ccmode{} assigns the @code{block-close} syntactic symbol to the
3420 brace that closes the @code{do} construct, and normally we'd like the
3421 line that follows a @code{block-close} brace to begin on a separate
3422 line. However, with ``do-while'' constructs, we want the
3423 @code{while} clause to follow the closing brace. To do this, we
3424 associate the @code{block-close} symbol with the @var{action} function
3425 @code{c-snug-do-while}:
3426
3427 @example
3428 (defun c-snug-do-while (syntax pos)
3429 "Dynamically calculate brace hanginess for do-while statements."
3430 (save-excursion
3431 (let (langelem)
3432 (if (and (eq syntax 'block-close)
3433 (setq langelem (assq 'block-close c-syntactic-context))
3434 (progn (goto-char (cdr langelem))
3435 (if (= (following-char) ?@{)
3436 (forward-sexp -1))
3437 (looking-at "\\<do\\>[^_]")))
3438 '(before)
3439 '(before after)))))
3440 @end example
3441
3442 @findex c-snug-do-while
3443 @findex snug-do-while (c-)
3444 This function simply looks to see if the brace closes a ``do-while''
3445 clause and if so, returns the list @samp{(before)} indicating
3446 that a newline should be inserted before the brace, but not after it.
3447 In all other cases, it returns the list @samp{(before after)} so
3448 that the brace appears on a line by itself.
3449
3450 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3451 @node Hanging Colons, Hanging Semicolons and Commas, Hanging Braces, Custom Auto-newlines
3452 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3453 @section Hanging Colons
3454 @cindex hanging colons
3455 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3456
3457 @cindex customization, colon hanging
3458 @vindex c-hanging-colons-alist
3459 @vindex hanging-colons-alist (c-)
3460
3461 Using a mechanism similar to brace hanging (@pxref{Hanging Braces}),
3462 colons can also be made to hang using the style variable
3463 @code{c-hanging-colons-alist}: when a colon is typed, @ccmode
3464 determines its syntactic context, looks this up in the alist
3465 @code{c-changing-colons-alist} and inserts up to two newlines
3466 accordingly. Here, however, If @ccmode fails to find an entry for a
3467 syntactic symbol in the alist, no newlines are inserted around the
3468 newly typed colon.
3469
3470 @defopt c-hanging-colons-alist
3471 @vindex hanging-colons-alist (c-)
3472
3473 @table @asis
3474 @item The Key: the syntactic symbol
3475 The syntactic symbols appropriate as keys in this association list
3476 are: @code{case-label}, @code{label}, @code{access-label},
3477 @code{member-init-intro}, and @code{inher-intro}. @xref{Syntactic
3478 Symbols}. Elements with any other value as a key get ignored.
3479
3480 @item The associated value: the ``ACTION'' list
3481 The @var{action} here is simply a list containing a combination of the
3482 symbols @code{before} and @code{after}. Unlike in
3483 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}, functions as @var{actions} are not
3484 supported; there doesn't seem to be any need for them.
3485 @end table
3486 @end defopt
3487
3488 In C++, double-colons are used as a scope operator but because these
3489 colons always appear right next to each other, newlines before and after
3490 them are controlled by a different mechanism, called @dfn{clean-ups} in
3491 @ccmode{}. @xref{Clean-ups}, for details.
3492
3493 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3494 @node Hanging Semicolons and Commas, , Hanging Colons, Custom Auto-newlines
3495 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3496 @section Hanging Semicolons and Commas
3497 @cindex hanging semicolons
3498 @cindex hanging commas
3499 @cindex customization, semicolon newlines
3500 @cindex customization, comma newlines
3501 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3502
3503 @defopt c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria
3504 @vindex hanging-semi&comma-criteria (c-)
3505 This style variable takes a list of functions; these get called when
3506 you type a semicolon or comma. The functions are called in order
3507 without arguments. When these functions are entered, point is just
3508 after the newly inserted @samp{;} or @samp{,} and they must preserve
3509 point (e.g., by using @code{save-excursion}). During the call, the
3510 variable @code{c-syntactic-context} is bound to the syntactic context
3511 of the current line@footnote{This was first introduced in @ccmode{}
3512 5.31.} @pxref{Custom Braces}. These functions don't insert newlines
3513 themselves, rather they direct @ccmode{} whether or not to do so.
3514 They should return one of the following values:
3515
3516 @table @code
3517 @item t
3518 A newline is to be inserted after the @samp{;} or @samp{,}, and no
3519 more functions from the list are to be called.
3520 @item stop
3521 No more functions from the list are to be called, and no newline is to
3522 be inserted.
3523 @item nil
3524 No determination has been made, and the next function in the list is
3525 to be called.
3526 @end table
3527
3528 Note that auto-newlines are never inserted @emph{before} a semicolon
3529 or comma. If every function in the list is called without a
3530 determination being made, then no newline is added.
3531
3532 In AWK mode, this variable is set by default to @code{nil}. In the
3533 other modes, the default value is a list containing a single function,
3534 @code{c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist}. This inserts newlines after all
3535 semicolons, apart from those separating @code{for}-clause statements.
3536 @end defopt
3537
3538 @defun c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks
3539 @findex semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks (c-)
3540 This is an example of a criteria function, provided by @ccmode{}. It
3541 prevents newlines from being inserted after semicolons when there is a
3542 non-blank following line. Otherwise, it makes no determination. To
3543 use, add this function to the front of the
3544 @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} list.
3545
3546 @example
3547 (defun c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks ()
3548 (save-excursion
3549 (if (and (eq last-command-char ?\;)
3550 (zerop (forward-line 1))
3551 (not (looking-at "^[ \t]*$")))
3552 'stop
3553 nil)))
3554 @end example
3555 @end defun
3556
3557 @defun c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist
3558 @findex semi&comma-inside-parenlist (c-)
3559 @defunx c-semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners
3560 @findex semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners (c-)
3561 The function @code{c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist} is what prevents
3562 newlines from being inserted inside the parenthesis list of @code{for}
3563 statements. In addition to
3564 @code{c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks} described above,
3565 @ccmode{} also comes with the criteria function
3566 @code{c-semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners}, which suppresses
3567 newlines after semicolons inside one-line inline method definitions
3568 (e.g., in C++ or Java).
3569 @end defun
3570
3571
3572 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3573 @node Clean-ups, Indentation Engine Basics, Custom Auto-newlines, Top
3574 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3575 @chapter Clean-ups
3576 @cindex clean-ups
3577 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3578
3579 @dfn{Clean-ups} are mechanisms which remove (or exceptionally, add)
3580 whitespace in specific circumstances and are complementary to colon
3581 and brace hanging. You enable a clean-up by adding its symbol into
3582 @code{c-cleanup-list}, e.g., like this:
3583
3584 @example
3585 (add-to-list 'c-cleanup-list 'space-before-funcall)
3586 @end example
3587
3588 On the surface, it would seem that clean-ups overlap the functionality
3589 provided by the @code{c-hanging-*-alist} variables. Clean-ups,
3590 however, are used to adjust code ``after-the-fact'', i.e., to adjust
3591 the whitespace in constructs later than when they were typed.
3592
3593 Most of the clean-ups remove automatically inserted newlines, and are
3594 only active when auto-newline minor mode is turned on. Others will
3595 work all the time. Note that clean-ups are only performed when there
3596 is nothing but whitespace appearing between the individual components
3597 of the construct, and (apart from @code{comment-close-slash}) when the
3598 construct does not occur within a literal (@pxref{Auto-newlines}).
3599
3600 @defopt c-cleanup-list
3601 @vindex cleanup-list (c-)
3602 @cindex literal
3603
3604 You configure @ccmode{}'s clean-ups by setting the style variable
3605 @code{c-cleanup-list}, which is a list of clean-up symbols. By
3606 default, @ccmode{} cleans up only the @code{scope-operator} construct,
3607 which is necessary for proper C++ support.
3608 @end defopt
3609
3610 These are the clean-ups that are only active when electric and
3611 auto-newline minor modes are enabled:
3612
3613 @c TBD: Would like to use some sort of @deffoo here; @table indents a
3614 @c bit too much in dvi output.
3615 @table @code
3616 @item brace-else-brace
3617 Clean up @samp{@} else @{} constructs by placing the entire construct on
3618 a single line. Clean up occurs when the open brace after the
3619 @samp{else} is typed. So for example, this:
3620
3621 @example
3622 @group
3623 void spam(int i)
3624 @{
3625 if( i==7 ) @{
3626 dosomething();
3627 @}
3628 else
3629 @{
3630 @end group
3631 @end example
3632
3633 @noindent
3634 appears like this after the last open brace is typed:
3635
3636 @example
3637 @group
3638 void spam(int i)
3639 @{
3640 if( i==7 ) @{
3641 dosomething();
3642 @} else @{
3643 @end group
3644 @end example
3645
3646 @item brace-elseif-brace
3647 Similar to the @code{brace-else-brace} clean-up, but this cleans up
3648 @samp{@} else if (...) @{} constructs. For example:
3649
3650 @example
3651 @group
3652 void spam(int i)
3653 @{
3654 if( i==7 ) @{
3655 dosomething();
3656 @}
3657 else if( i==3 )
3658 @{
3659 @end group
3660 @end example
3661
3662 @noindent
3663 appears like this after the last open parenthesis is typed:
3664
3665 @example
3666 @group
3667 void spam(int i)
3668 @{
3669 if( i==7 ) @{
3670 dosomething();
3671 @} else if(
3672 @end group
3673 @end example
3674
3675 @noindent
3676 and like this after the last open brace is typed:
3677
3678 @example
3679 @group
3680 void spam(int i)
3681 @{
3682 if( i==7 ) @{
3683 dosomething();
3684 @} else if( i==3 ) @{
3685 @end group
3686 @end example
3687
3688 @item brace-catch-brace
3689 Analogous to @code{brace-elseif-brace}, but cleans up @samp{@} catch
3690 (...) @{} in C++ and Java mode.
3691
3692 @item empty-defun-braces
3693 Clean up braces following a top-level function or class definition that
3694 contains no body. Clean up occurs when the closing brace is typed.
3695 Thus the following:
3696
3697 @example
3698 @group
3699 class Spam
3700 @{
3701 @}
3702 @end group
3703 @end example
3704
3705 @noindent
3706 is transformed into this when the close brace is typed:
3707
3708 @example
3709 @group
3710 class Spam
3711 @{@}
3712 @end group
3713 @end example
3714
3715 @item defun-close-semi
3716 Clean up the terminating semicolon on top-level function or class
3717 definitions when they follow a close brace. Clean up occurs when the
3718 semicolon is typed. So for example, the following:
3719
3720 @example
3721 @group
3722 class Spam
3723 @{
3724 ...
3725 @}
3726 ;
3727 @end group
3728 @end example
3729
3730 @noindent
3731 is transformed into this when the semicolon is typed:
3732
3733 @example
3734 @group
3735 class Spam
3736 @{
3737 ...
3738 @};
3739 @end group
3740 @end example
3741
3742 @item list-close-comma
3743 Clean up commas following braces in array and aggregate initializers.
3744 Clean up occurs when the comma is typed. The space before the comma
3745 is zapped just like the space before the semicolon in
3746 @code{defun-close-semi}.
3747
3748 @item scope-operator
3749 Clean up double colons which might designate a C++ scope operator split
3750 across multiple lines@footnote{Certain C++ constructs introduce
3751 ambiguous situations, so @code{scope-operator} clean-ups might not
3752 always be correct. This usually only occurs when scoped identifiers
3753 appear in switch label tags.}. Clean up occurs when the second colon is
3754 typed. You will always want @code{scope-operator} in the
3755 @code{c-cleanup-list} when you are editing C++ code.
3756
3757 @item one-liner-defun
3758 Clean up a single line of code enclosed by defun braces by removing
3759 the whitespace before and after the code. The clean-up happens when
3760 the closing brace is typed. If the variable
3761 @code{c-max-one-liner-length} is set, the cleanup is only done if the
3762 resulting line would be no longer than the value of that variable.
3763
3764 For example, consider this AWK code:
3765
3766 @example
3767 @group
3768 BEGIN @{
3769 FS = "\t" # use <TAB> as a field separator
3770 @}
3771 @end group
3772 @end example
3773
3774 @noindent
3775 It gets compacted to the following when the closing brace is typed:
3776
3777 @example
3778 @group
3779 BEGIN @{FS = "\t"@} # use <TAB> as a field separator
3780 @end group
3781 @end example
3782
3783 @defopt c-max-one-liner-length
3784 @vindex max-one-liner-length (c-)
3785 The maximum length of the resulting line for which the clean-up
3786 @code{one-liner-defun} will be triggered. This length is that of the entire
3787 line, including any leading whitespace and any trailing comment. Its
3788 default value is 80. If the value is zero or @code{nil}, no limit
3789 applies.
3790 @end defopt
3791 @end table
3792
3793 The following clean-ups are always active when they occur on
3794 @code{c-cleanup-list}, regardless of whether Electric minor mode or
3795 Auto-newline minor mode are enabled:
3796
3797 @table @code
3798 @item space-before-funcall
3799 Insert a space between the function name and the opening parenthesis
3800 of a function call. This produces function calls in the style
3801 mandated by the GNU coding standards, e.g., @samp{signal@w{ }(SIGINT,
3802 SIG_IGN)} and @samp{abort@w{ }()}. Clean up occurs when the opening
3803 parenthesis is typed. This clean-up should never be active in AWK
3804 Mode, since such a space is syntactically invalid for user defined
3805 functions.
3806
3807 @item compact-empty-funcall
3808 Clean up any space between the function name and the opening parenthesis
3809 of a function call that has no arguments. This is typically used
3810 together with @code{space-before-funcall} if you prefer the GNU function
3811 call style for functions with arguments but think it looks ugly when
3812 it's only an empty parenthesis pair. I.e., you will get @samp{signal
3813 (SIGINT, SIG_IGN)}, but @samp{abort()}. Clean up occurs when the
3814 closing parenthesis is typed.
3815
3816 @item comment-close-slash
3817 When inside a block comment, terminate the comment when you type a slash
3818 at the beginning of a line (i.e., immediately after the comment prefix).
3819 This clean-up removes whitespace preceding the slash and if needed,
3820 inserts a star to complete the token @samp{*/}. Type @kbd{C-q /} in this
3821 situation if you just want a literal @samp{/} inserted.
3822 @end table
3823
3824
3825 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3826 @node Indentation Engine Basics, Customizing Indentation, Clean-ups, Top
3827 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3828 @chapter Indentation Engine Basics
3829 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3830
3831 This chapter will briefly cover how @ccmode{} indents lines of code.
3832 It is helpful to understand the indentation model being used so that
3833 you will know how to customize @ccmode{} for your personal coding
3834 style. All the details are in @ref{Customizing Indentation}.
3835
3836 @ccmode{} has an indentation engine that provides a flexible and
3837 general mechanism for customizing indentation. When @ccmode{} indents
3838 a line of code, it separates its calculations into two steps:
3839
3840 @enumerate
3841 @item
3842 @cindex syntactic symbol
3843 @cindex anchor position
3844 It analyzes the line to determine its @dfn{syntactic symbol(s)} (the
3845 kind of language construct it's looking at) and its @dfn{anchor
3846 position} (the position earlier in the file that @ccmode{} will indent
3847 the line relative to). The anchor position might be the location of
3848 an opening brace in the previous line, for example. @xref{Syntactic
3849 Analysis}.
3850 @item
3851 @cindex offsets
3852 @cindex indentation offset specifications
3853 It looks up the syntactic symbol(s) in the configuration to get the
3854 corresponding @dfn{offset(s)}. The symbol @code{+}, which means
3855 ``indent this line one more level'' is a typical offset. @ccmode{}
3856 then applies these offset(s) to the anchor position, giving the
3857 indentation for the line. The different sorts of offsets are
3858 described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}.
3859 @end enumerate
3860
3861 In exceptional circumstances, the syntax directed indentation
3862 described here may be a nuisance rather than a help. You can disable
3863 it by setting @code{c-syntactic-indentation} to @code{nil}. (To set
3864 the variable interactively, @ref{Minor Modes}).
3865
3866 @defopt c-syntactic-indentation
3867 @vindex syntactic-indentation (c-)
3868 When this is non-@code{nil} (which it is by default), the indentation
3869 of code is done according to its syntactic structure. When it's
3870 @code{nil}, every line is just indented to the same level as the
3871 previous one, and @kbd{TAB} (@code{c-indent-command}) adjusts the
3872 indentation in steps of @code{c-basic-offset}. The current style
3873 (@pxref{Config Basics}) then has no effect on indentation, nor do any
3874 of the variables associated with indentation, not even
3875 @code{c-special-indent-hook}.
3876 @end defopt
3877
3878 @menu
3879 * Syntactic Analysis::
3880 * Syntactic Symbols::
3881 * Indentation Calculation::
3882 @end menu
3883
3884
3885 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3886 @node Syntactic Analysis, Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Engine Basics, Indentation Engine Basics
3887 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3888 @section Syntactic Analysis
3889 @cindex syntactic analysis
3890 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3891
3892 @cindex syntactic element
3893 @cindex syntactic context
3894 The first thing @ccmode{} does when indenting a line of code, is to
3895 analyze the line, determining the @dfn{syntactic context} of the
3896 (first) construct on that line. It's a list of @dfn{syntactic
3897 elements}, where each syntactic element in turn is a list@footnote{In
3898 @ccmode 5.28 and earlier, a syntactic element was a dotted pair; the
3899 cons was the syntactic symbol and the cdr was the anchor position.
3900 For compatibility's sake, the parameter passed to a line-up function
3901 still has this dotted pair form (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}).} Here is a
3902 brief and typical example:
3903
3904 @example
3905 ((defun-block-intro 1959))
3906 @end example
3907
3908 @cindex syntactic symbol
3909 @noindent
3910 The first thing inside each syntactic element is always a
3911 @dfn{syntactic symbol}. It describes the kind of construct that was
3912 recognized, e.g., @code{statement}, @code{substatement},
3913 @code{class-open}, @code{class-close}, etc. @xref{Syntactic Symbols},
3914 for a complete list of currently recognized syntactic symbols and
3915 their semantics. The remaining entries are various data associated
3916 with the recognized construct; there might be zero or more.
3917
3918 @cindex anchor position
3919 Conceptually, a line of code is always indented relative to some
3920 position higher up in the buffer (typically the indentation of the
3921 previous line). That position is the @dfn{anchor position} in the
3922 syntactic element. If there is an entry after the syntactic symbol in
3923 the syntactic element list then it's either nil or that anchor position.
3924
3925 Here is an example. Suppose we had the following code as the only thing
3926 in a C++ buffer @footnote{The line numbers in this and future examples
3927 don't actually appear in the buffer, of course!}:
3928
3929 @example
3930 1: void swap( int& a, int& b )
3931 2: @{
3932 3: int tmp = a;
3933 4: a = b;
3934 5: b = tmp;
3935 6: @}
3936 @end example
3937
3938 @noindent
3939 We can use @kbd{C-c C-s} (@code{c-show-syntactic-information}) to
3940 report what the syntactic analysis is for the current line:
3941
3942 @table @asis
3943 @item @kbd{C-c C-s} (@code{c-show-syntactic-information})
3944 @kindex C-c C-s
3945 @findex c-show-syntactic-information
3946 @findex show-syntactic-information (c-)
3947 This command calculates the syntactic analysis of the current line and
3948 displays it in the minibuffer. The command also highlights the anchor
3949 position(s).
3950 @end table
3951
3952 Running this command on line 4 of this example, we'd see in the echo
3953 area@footnote{With a universal argument (i.e., @kbd{C-u C-c C-s}) the
3954 analysis is inserted into the buffer as a comment on the current
3955 line.}:
3956
3957 @example
3958 ((statement 35))
3959 @end example
3960
3961 @noindent
3962 and the @samp{i} of @code{int} on line 3 would be highlighted. This
3963 tells us that the line is a statement and it is indented relative to
3964 buffer position 35, the highlighted position. If you were to move
3965 point to line 3 and hit @kbd{C-c C-s}, you would see:
3966
3967 @example
3968 ((defun-block-intro 29))
3969 @end example
3970
3971 @noindent
3972 This indicates that the @samp{int} line is the first statement in a top
3973 level function block, and is indented relative to buffer position 29,
3974 which is the brace just after the function header.
3975
3976 Here's another example:
3977
3978 @example
3979 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
3980 2: @{
3981 3: if( doit )
3982 4: @{
3983 5: return( val + incr );
3984 6: @}
3985 7: return( val );
3986 8: @}
3987 @end example
3988
3989 @noindent
3990 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 4 gives us:
3991
3992 @example
3993 ((substatement-open 46))
3994 @end example
3995
3996 @cindex substatement
3997 @cindex substatement block
3998 @noindent
3999 which tells us that this is a brace that @emph{opens} a substatement
4000 block. @footnote{A @dfn{substatement} is the line after a
4001 conditional statement, such as @code{if}, @code{else}, @code{while},
4002 @code{do}, @code{switch}, etc. A @dfn{substatement
4003 block} is a brace block following one of these conditional statements.}
4004
4005 @cindex comment-only line
4006 Syntactic contexts can contain more than one element, and syntactic
4007 elements need not have anchor positions. The most common example of
4008 this is a @dfn{comment-only line}:
4009
4010 @example
4011 1: void draw_list( List<Drawables>& drawables )
4012 2: @{
4013 3: // call the virtual draw() method on each element in list
4014 4: for( int i=0; i < drawables.count(), ++i )
4015 5: @{
4016 6: drawables[i].draw();
4017 7: @}
4018 8: @}
4019 @end example
4020
4021 @noindent
4022 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 3 of this example gives:
4023
4024 @example
4025 ((comment-intro) (defun-block-intro 46))
4026 @end example
4027
4028 @noindent
4029 and you can see that the syntactic context contains two syntactic
4030 elements. Notice that the first element, @samp{(comment-intro)}, has no
4031 anchor position.
4032
4033
4034 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4035 @node Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Calculation, Syntactic Analysis, Indentation Engine Basics
4036 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4037 @section Syntactic Symbols
4038 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4039
4040 @cindex syntactic symbols, brief list
4041 @vindex c-offsets-alist
4042 @vindex offsets-alist (c-)
4043 This section is a complete list of the syntactic symbols which appear
4044 in the @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable, along with brief
4045 descriptions. The previous section (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis})
4046 states what syntactic symbols are and how the indentation engine uses
4047 them.
4048
4049 More detailed descriptions of these symbols, together with snippets of
4050 source code to which they apply, appear in the examples in the
4051 subsections below. Note that, in the interests of brevity, the anchor
4052 position associated with most syntactic symbols is @emph{not}
4053 specified. In cases of doubt, type @kbd{C-c C-s} on a pertinent
4054 line---this highlights the anchor position.
4055
4056 @ssindex -open symbols
4057 @ssindex -close symbols
4058 @ssindex -block-intro symbols
4059 The syntactic symbols which indicate brace constructs follow a general
4060 naming convention. When a line begins with an open or close brace,
4061 its syntactic symbol will contain the suffix @code{-open} or
4062 @code{-close} respectively. The first line within the brace block
4063 construct will contain the suffix @code{-block-intro}.
4064
4065 @ssindex -intro symbols
4066 @ssindex -cont symbols
4067 In constructs which can span several lines, a distinction is usually
4068 made between the first line that introduces the construct and the
4069 lines that continue it. The syntactic symbols that indicate these
4070 lines will contain the suffixes @code{-intro} or @code{-cont}
4071 respectively.
4072
4073 The best way to understand how all this works is by looking at some
4074 examples. Remember that you can see the syntax of any source code
4075 line by using @kbd{C-c C-s}.
4076
4077 @table @code
4078 @item string
4079 Inside a multiline string. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4080 @item c
4081 Inside a multiline C style block comment. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4082 @item defun-open
4083 Brace that opens a top-level function definition. @ref{Function
4084 Symbols}.
4085 @item defun-close
4086 Brace that closes a top-level function definition. @ref{Function
4087 Symbols}.
4088 @item defun-block-intro
4089 The first line in a top-level defun. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4090 @item class-open
4091 Brace that opens a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4092 @item class-close
4093 Brace that closes a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4094 @item inline-open
4095 Brace that opens an in-class inline method. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4096 @item inline-close
4097 Brace that closes an in-class inline method. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4098 @item func-decl-cont
4099 The region between a function definition's argument list and the
4100 function opening brace (excluding K&R argument declarations). In C,
4101 you cannot put anything but whitespace and comments in this region,
4102 however in C++ and Java, @code{throws} declarations and other things
4103 can appear here. @ref{Literal Symbols}. @c @emph{FIXME!!! Can it not
4104 @c go somewhere better?}
4105 @item knr-argdecl-intro
4106 First line of a K&R C argument declaration. @ref{K&R Symbols}.
4107 @item knr-argdecl
4108 Subsequent lines in a K&R C argument declaration. @ref{K&R Symbols}.
4109 @item topmost-intro
4110 The first line in a ``topmost'' definition. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4111 @item topmost-intro-cont
4112 Topmost definition continuation lines. This is only used in the parts
4113 that aren't covered by other symbols such as @code{func-decl-cont} and
4114 @code{knr-argdecl}. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4115 @item annotation-top-cont
4116 Topmost definition continuation lines where all previous items are
4117 annotations. @ref{Java Symbols}.
4118 @item member-init-intro
4119 First line in a member initialization list. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4120 @item member-init-cont
4121 Subsequent member initialization list lines. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4122 @item inher-intro
4123 First line of a multiple inheritance list. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4124 @item inher-cont
4125 Subsequent multiple inheritance lines. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4126 @item block-open
4127 Statement block open brace. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4128 @item block-close
4129 Statement block close brace. @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4130 @item brace-list-open
4131 Open brace of an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4132 @item brace-list-close
4133 Close brace of an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4134 @item brace-list-intro
4135 First line in an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4136 @item brace-list-entry
4137 Subsequent lines in an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List
4138 Symbols}.
4139 @item brace-entry-open
4140 Subsequent lines in an enum or static array list where the line begins
4141 with an open brace. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4142 @item statement
4143 A statement. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4144 @item statement-cont
4145 A continuation of a statement. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4146 @item annotation-var-cont
4147 A continuation of a statement where all previous items are
4148 annotations. @ref{Java Symbols}.
4149 @item statement-block-intro
4150 The first line in a new statement block. @ref{Conditional Construct
4151 Symbols}.
4152 @item statement-case-intro
4153 The first line in a case block. @ref{Switch Statement Symbols}.
4154 @item statement-case-open
4155 The first line in a case block that starts with a brace. @ref{Switch
4156 Statement Symbols}.
4157 @item substatement
4158 The first line after a conditional or loop construct.
4159 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4160 @item substatement-open
4161 The brace that opens a substatement block. @ref{Conditional Construct
4162 Symbols}.
4163 @item substatement-label
4164 The first line after a conditional or loop construct if it's a label.
4165 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4166 @item case-label
4167 A label in a @code{switch} block. @ref{Switch Statement Symbols}.
4168 @item access-label
4169 C++ access control label. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4170 @item label
4171 Any other label. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4172 @item do-while-closure
4173 The @code{while} line that ends a @code{do}-@code{while} construct.
4174 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4175 @item else-clause
4176 The @code{else} line of an @code{if}-@code{else} construct.
4177 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4178 @item catch-clause
4179 The @code{catch} or @code{finally} (in Java) line of a
4180 @code{try}-@code{catch} construct. @ref{Conditional Construct
4181 Symbols}.
4182 @item comment-intro
4183 A line containing only a comment introduction. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4184 @item arglist-intro
4185 The first line in an argument list. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4186 @item arglist-cont
4187 Subsequent argument list lines when no arguments follow on the same
4188 line as the arglist opening paren. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4189 @item arglist-cont-nonempty
4190 Subsequent argument list lines when at least one argument follows on
4191 the same line as the arglist opening paren. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4192 @item arglist-close
4193 The solo close paren of an argument list. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4194 @item stream-op
4195 Lines continuing a stream operator (C++ only). @ref{Literal
4196 Symbols}. @c @emph{FIXME!!! Can this not be moved somewhere better?}
4197 @item inclass
4198 The line is nested inside a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4199 @item cpp-macro
4200 The start of a preprocessor macro definition. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4201 @item cpp-define-intro
4202 The first line inside a multiline preprocessor macro if
4203 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is set. @ref{Multiline Macro
4204 Symbols}.
4205 @item cpp-macro-cont
4206 All lines inside multiline preprocessor macros if
4207 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is @code{nil}.
4208 @ref{Multiline Macro Symbols}.
4209 @item friend
4210 A C++ friend declaration. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4211 @item objc-method-intro
4212 The first line of an Objective-C method definition. @ref{Objective-C
4213 Method Symbols}.
4214 @item objc-method-args-cont
4215 Lines continuing an Objective-C method definition. @ref{Objective-C
4216 Method Symbols}.
4217 @item objc-method-call-cont
4218 Lines continuing an Objective-C method call. @ref{Objective-C Method
4219 Symbols}.
4220 @item extern-lang-open
4221 Brace that opens an @code{extern} block (e.g., @code{extern "C"
4222 @{...@}}). @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4223 @item extern-lang-close
4224 Brace that closes an @code{extern} block. @ref{External Scope
4225 Symbols}.
4226 @item inextern-lang
4227 Analogous to @code{inclass} syntactic symbol, but used inside
4228 @code{extern} blocks. @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4229 @item namespace-open
4230 @itemx namespace-close
4231 @itemx innamespace
4232 These are analogous to the three @code{extern-lang} symbols above, but
4233 are returned for C++ namespace blocks. @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4234 @item module-open
4235 @itemx module-close
4236 @itemx inmodule
4237 Analogous to the above, but for CORBA IDL @code{module} blocks.
4238 @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4239 @item composition-open
4240 @itemx composition-close
4241 @itemx incomposition
4242 Analogous to the above, but for CORBA CIDL @code{composition} blocks.
4243 @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4244 @item template-args-cont
4245 C++ template argument list continuations. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4246 @item inlambda
4247 Analogous to @code{inclass} syntactic symbol, but used inside lambda
4248 (i.e., anonymous) functions. Only used in Pike mode. @ref{Statement
4249 Block Symbols}.
4250 @item lambda-intro-cont
4251 Lines continuing the header of a lambda function, i.e., between the
4252 @code{lambda} keyword and the function body. Only used in Pike mode.
4253 @ref{Statement Block Symbols}.
4254 @item inexpr-statement
4255 A statement block inside an expression. The gcc C and C++ extension
4256 for this is recognized. It's also used for the special functions that
4257 take a statement block as an argument in Pike. @ref{Statement Block
4258 Symbols}.
4259 @item inexpr-class
4260 A class definition inside an expression. This is used for anonymous
4261 classes in Java. It's also used for anonymous array initializers in
4262 Java. @ref{Java Symbols}.
4263 @end table
4264
4265 @menu
4266 * Function Symbols::
4267 * Class Symbols::
4268 * Conditional Construct Symbols::
4269 * Switch Statement Symbols::
4270 * Brace List Symbols::
4271 * External Scope Symbols::
4272 * Paren List Symbols::
4273 * Literal Symbols::
4274 * Multiline Macro Symbols::
4275 * Objective-C Method Symbols::
4276 * Java Symbols::
4277 * Statement Block Symbols::
4278 * K&R Symbols::
4279 @end menu
4280
4281 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4282 @node Function Symbols, Class Symbols, Syntactic Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4283 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4284 @subsection Function Symbols
4285 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4286
4287 This example shows a typical function declaration.
4288
4289 @example
4290 1: void
4291 2: swap( int& a, int& b )
4292 3: @{
4293 4: int tmp = a;
4294 5: a = b;
4295 6: b = tmp;
4296 7: int ignored =
4297 8: a + b;
4298 9: @}
4299 @end example
4300
4301 @ssindex topmost-intro
4302 @ssindex topmost-intro-cont
4303 @ssindex defun-open
4304 @ssindex defun-close
4305 @ssindex defun-block-intro
4306 Line 1 shows a @code{topmost-intro} since it is the first line that
4307 introduces a top-level construct. Line 2 is a continuation of the
4308 top-level construct introduction so it has the syntax
4309 @code{topmost-intro-cont}. Line 3 shows a @code{defun-open} since it is
4310 the brace that opens a top-level function definition. Line 9 is the
4311 corresponding
4312 @code{defun-close} since it contains the brace that closes the top-level
4313 function definition. Line 4 is a @code{defun-block-intro}, i.e., it is
4314 the first line of a brace-block, enclosed in a
4315 top-level function definition.
4316
4317 @ssindex statement
4318 @ssindex statement-cont
4319 Lines 5, 6, and 7 are all given @code{statement} syntax since there
4320 isn't much special about them. Note however that line 8 is given
4321 @code{statement-cont} syntax since it continues the statement begun
4322 on the previous line.
4323
4324 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4325 @node Class Symbols, Conditional Construct Symbols, Function Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4326 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4327 @subsection Class related Symbols
4328 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4329
4330 Here's an example which illustrates some C++ class syntactic symbols:
4331
4332 @example
4333 1: class Bass
4334 2: : public Guitar,
4335 3: public Amplifiable
4336 4: @{
4337 5: public:
4338 6: Bass()
4339 7: : eString( new BassString( 0.105 )),
4340 8: aString( new BassString( 0.085 )),
4341 9: dString( new BassString( 0.065 )),
4342 10: gString( new BassString( 0.045 ))
4343 11: @{
4344 12: eString.tune( 'E' );
4345 13: aString.tune( 'A' );
4346 14: dString.tune( 'D' );
4347 15: gString.tune( 'G' );
4348 16: @}
4349 17: friend class Luthier;
4350 18: @};
4351 @end example
4352
4353 @ssindex class-open
4354 @ssindex class-close
4355 As in the previous example, line 1 has the @code{topmost-intro} syntax.
4356 Here however, the brace that opens a C++ class definition on line 4 is
4357 assigned the @code{class-open} syntax. Note that in C++, classes,
4358 structs, and unions are essentially equivalent syntactically (and are
4359 very similar semantically), so replacing the @code{class} keyword in the
4360 example above with @code{struct} or @code{union} would still result in a
4361 syntax of @code{class-open} for line 4 @footnote{This is the case even
4362 for C and Objective-C@. For consistency, structs in all supported
4363 languages are syntactically equivalent to classes. Note however that
4364 the keyword @code{class} is meaningless in C and Objective-C.}.
4365 Similarly, line 18 is assigned @code{class-close} syntax.
4366
4367 @ssindex inher-intro
4368 @ssindex inher-cont
4369 Line 2 introduces the inheritance list for the class so it is assigned
4370 the @code{inher-intro} syntax, and line 3, which continues the
4371 inheritance list is given @code{inher-cont} syntax.
4372
4373 @ssindex access-label
4374 @ssindex inclass
4375 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 5 shows the following analysis:
4376
4377 @example
4378 ((inclass 58) (access-label 58))
4379 @end example
4380
4381 @noindent
4382 The primary syntactic symbol for this line is @code{access-label} as
4383 this is a label keyword that specifies access protection in C++. However,
4384 because this line is also a top-level construct inside a class
4385 definition, the analysis actually shows two syntactic symbols. The
4386 other syntactic symbol assigned to this line is @code{inclass}.
4387 Similarly, line 6 is given both @code{inclass} and @code{topmost-intro}
4388 syntax:
4389
4390 @example
4391 ((inclass 58) (topmost-intro 60))
4392 @end example
4393
4394 @ssindex member-init-intro
4395 @ssindex member-init-cont
4396 Line 7 introduces a C++ member initialization list and as such is given
4397 @code{member-init-intro} syntax. Note that in this case it is
4398 @emph{not} assigned @code{inclass} since this is not considered a
4399 top-level construct. Lines 8 through 10 are all assigned
4400 @code{member-init-cont} since they continue the member initialization
4401 list started on line 7.
4402
4403 @cindex in-class inline methods
4404 @ssindex inline-open
4405 @ssindex inline-close
4406 Line 11's analysis is a bit more complicated:
4407
4408 @example
4409 ((inclass 58) (inline-open))
4410 @end example
4411
4412 This line is assigned a syntax of both @code{inline-open} and
4413 @code{inclass} because it opens an @dfn{in-class} C++ inline method
4414 definition. This is distinct from, but related to, the C++ notion of an
4415 inline function in that its definition occurs inside an enclosing class
4416 definition, which in C++ implies that the function should be inlined.
4417 However, if the definition of the @code{Bass} constructor appeared
4418 outside the class definition, the construct would be given the
4419 @code{defun-open} syntax, even if the keyword @code{inline} appeared
4420 before the method name, as in:
4421
4422 @example
4423 1: class Bass
4424 2: : public Guitar,
4425 3: public Amplifiable
4426 4: @{
4427 5: public:
4428 6: Bass();
4429 7: @};
4430 8:
4431 9: inline
4432 10: Bass::Bass()
4433 11: : eString( new BassString( 0.105 )),
4434 12: aString( new BassString( 0.085 )),
4435 13: dString( new BassString( 0.065 )),
4436 14: gString( new BassString( 0.045 ))
4437 15: @{
4438 16: eString.tune( 'E' );
4439 17: aString.tune( 'A' );
4440 18: dString.tune( 'D' );
4441 19: gString.tune( 'G' );
4442 20: @}
4443 @end example
4444
4445 @ssindex friend
4446 Returning to the previous example, line 16 is given @code{inline-close}
4447 syntax, while line 12 is given @code{defun-block-open} syntax, and lines
4448 13 through 15 are all given @code{statement} syntax. Line 17 is
4449 interesting in that its syntactic analysis list contains three
4450 elements:
4451
4452 @example
4453 ((inclass 58) (topmost-intro 380) (friend))
4454 @end example
4455
4456 The @code{friend} and @code{inline-open} syntactic symbols are
4457 modifiers that do not have anchor positions.
4458
4459 @ssindex template-args-cont
4460 Template definitions introduce yet another syntactic symbol:
4461
4462 @example
4463 1: ThingManager <int,
4464 2: Framework::Callback *,
4465 3: Mutex> framework_callbacks;
4466 @end example
4467
4468 Here, line 1 is analyzed as a @code{topmost-intro}, but lines 2 and 3
4469 are both analyzed as @code{template-args-cont} lines.
4470
4471 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4472 @node Conditional Construct Symbols, Switch Statement Symbols, Class Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4473 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4474 @subsection Conditional Construct Symbols
4475 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4476
4477 Here is a (totally contrived) example which illustrates how syntax is
4478 assigned to various conditional constructs:
4479
4480 @example
4481 1: void spam( int index )
4482 2: @{
4483 3: for( int i=0; i<index; i++ )
4484 4: @{
4485 5: if( i == 10 )
4486 6: do_something_special();
4487 7: else
4488 8: silly_label:
4489 9: do_something( i );
4490 10: @}
4491 11: do @{
4492 12: another_thing( i-- );
4493 13: @}
4494 14: while( i > 0 );
4495 15: @}
4496 @end example
4497
4498 Only the lines that illustrate new syntactic symbols will be discussed.
4499
4500 @ssindex substatement-open
4501 @ssindex statement-block-intro
4502 @ssindex block-close
4503 Line 4 has a brace which opens a conditional's substatement block. It
4504 is thus assigned @code{substatement-open} syntax, and since line 5 is
4505 the first line in the substatement block, it is assigned
4506 @code{statement-block-intro} syntax. Line 10 contains the brace
4507 that closes the inner substatement block, and is therefore given the
4508 syntax @code{block-close}@footnote{@code{block-open} is used only for
4509 ``free-standing'' blocks, and is somewhat rare (@pxref{Literal
4510 Symbols} for an example.)}. Line 13 is treated the same way.
4511
4512 @ssindex substatement
4513 Lines 6 and 9 are also substatements of conditionals, but since they
4514 don't start blocks they are given @code{substatement} syntax
4515 instead of @code{substatement-open}.
4516
4517 @ssindex substatement-label
4518 Line 8 contains a label, which is normally given @code{label} syntax.
4519 This one is however a bit special since it's between a conditional and
4520 its substatement. It's analyzed as @code{substatement-label} to let you
4521 handle this rather odd case differently from normal labels.
4522
4523 @ssindex else-clause
4524 @ssindex catch-clause
4525 Line 7 start with an @code{else} that matches the @code{if} statement on
4526 line 5. It is therefore given the @code{else-clause} syntax and is
4527 anchored on the matching @code{if}. The @code{try}-@code{catch}
4528 constructs in C++ and Java are treated this way too, except that
4529 @code{catch} and (in Java) @code{finally}, are marked with
4530 @code{catch-clause}.
4531
4532 @ssindex do-while-closure
4533 The @code{while} construct on line 14 that closes a @code{do}
4534 conditional is given the special syntax @code{do-while-closure} if it
4535 appears on a line by itself. Note that if the @code{while} appeared on
4536 the same line as the preceding close brace, that line would still have
4537 @code{block-close} syntax.
4538
4539 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4540 @node Switch Statement Symbols, Brace List Symbols, Conditional Construct Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4541 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4542 @subsection Switch Statement Symbols
4543 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4544
4545 Switch statements have their own set of syntactic symbols. Here's an
4546 example:
4547
4548 @example
4549 1: void spam( enum Ingredient i )
4550 2: @{
4551 3: switch( i ) @{
4552 4: case Ham:
4553 5: be_a_pig();
4554 6: break;
4555 7: case Salt:
4556 8: drink_some_water();
4557 9: break;
4558 10: default:
4559 11: @{
4560 12: what_is_it();
4561 13: break;
4562 14: @}
4563 15: @}
4564 14: @}
4565 @end example
4566
4567 @ssindex case-label
4568 @ssindex statement-case-intro
4569 @ssindex statement-case-open
4570 Here, lines 4, 7, and 10 are all assigned @code{case-label} syntax,
4571 while lines 5 and 8 are assigned @code{statement-case-intro}. Line 11
4572 is treated slightly differently since it contains a brace that opens a
4573 block; it is given @code{statement-case-open} syntax.
4574
4575 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4576 @node Brace List Symbols, External Scope Symbols, Switch Statement Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4577 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4578 @subsection Brace List Symbols
4579 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4580
4581 @cindex brace lists
4582 There are a set of syntactic symbols that are used to recognize
4583 constructs inside of brace lists. A brace list is defined as an
4584 @code{enum} or aggregate initializer list, such as might statically
4585 initialize an array of structs. The three special aggregate constructs
4586 in Pike, @code{(@{ @})}, @code{([ ])} and @code{(< >)}, are treated as
4587 brace lists too. An example:
4588
4589 @example
4590 1: static char* ingredients[] =
4591 2: @{
4592 3: "Ham",
4593 4: "Salt",
4594 5: NULL
4595 6: @};
4596 @end example
4597
4598 @ssindex brace-list-open
4599 @ssindex brace-list-intro
4600 @ssindex brace-list-close
4601 @ssindex brace-list-entry
4602 Following convention, line 2 in this example is assigned
4603 @code{brace-list-open} syntax, and line 3 is assigned
4604 @code{brace-list-intro} syntax. Likewise, line 6 is assigned
4605 @code{brace-list-close} syntax. Lines 4 and 5 however, are assigned
4606 @code{brace-list-entry} syntax, as would all subsequent lines in this
4607 initializer list.
4608
4609 @ssindex brace-entry-open
4610 Your static initializer might be initializing nested structures, for
4611 example:
4612
4613 @example
4614 1: struct intpairs[] =
4615 2: @{
4616 3: @{ 1, 2 @},
4617 4: @{
4618 5: 3,
4619 6: 4
4620 7: @}
4621 8: @{ 1,
4622 9: 2 @},
4623 10: @{ 3, 4 @}
4624 11: @};
4625 @end example
4626
4627 Here, you've already seen the analysis of lines 1, 2, 3, and 11. On
4628 line 4, things get interesting; this line is assigned
4629 @code{brace-entry-open} syntactic symbol because it's a bracelist entry
4630 line that starts with an open brace. Lines 5 and 6 (and line 9) are
4631 pretty standard, and line 7 is a @code{brace-list-close} as you'd
4632 expect. Once again, line 8 is assigned as @code{brace-entry-open} as is
4633 line 10.
4634
4635 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4636 @node External Scope Symbols, Paren List Symbols, Brace List Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4637 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4638 @subsection External Scope Symbols
4639 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4640
4641 External language definition blocks also have their own syntactic
4642 symbols. In this example:
4643
4644 @example
4645 1: extern "C"
4646 2: @{
4647 3: int thing_one( int );
4648 4: int thing_two( double );
4649 5: @}
4650 @end example
4651
4652 @ssindex extern-lang-open
4653 @ssindex extern-lang-close
4654 @ssindex inextern-lang
4655 @ssindex inclass
4656 @noindent
4657 line 2 is given the @code{extern-lang-open} syntax, while line 5 is given
4658 the @code{extern-lang-close} syntax. The analysis for line 3 yields:
4659
4660 @example
4661 ((inextern-lang) (topmost-intro 14))
4662 @end example
4663
4664 @noindent
4665 where @code{inextern-lang} is a modifier similar in purpose to
4666 @code{inclass}.
4667
4668 There are various other top level blocks like @code{extern}, and they
4669 are all treated in the same way except that the symbols are named after
4670 the keyword that introduces the block. E.g., C++ namespace blocks get
4671 the three symbols @code{namespace-open}, @code{namespace-close} and
4672 @code{innamespace}. The currently recognized top level blocks are:
4673
4674 @table @asis
4675 @item @code{extern-lang-open}, @code{extern-lang-close}, @code{inextern-lang}
4676 @code{extern} blocks in C and C++.@footnote{These should logically be
4677 named @code{extern-open}, @code{extern-close} and @code{inextern}, but
4678 that isn't the case for historical reasons.}
4679
4680 @item @code{namespace-open}, @code{namespace-close}, @code{innamespace}
4681 @ssindex namespace-open
4682 @ssindex namespace-close
4683 @ssindex innamespace
4684 @code{namespace} blocks in C++.
4685
4686 @item @code{module-open}, @code{module-close}, @code{inmodule}
4687 @ssindex module-open
4688 @ssindex module-close
4689 @ssindex inmodule
4690 @code{module} blocks in CORBA IDL.
4691
4692 @item @code{composition-open}, @code{composition-close}, @code{incomposition}
4693 @ssindex composition-open
4694 @ssindex composition-close
4695 @ssindex incomposition
4696 @code{composition} blocks in CORBA CIDL.
4697 @end table
4698
4699 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4700 @node Paren List Symbols, Literal Symbols, External Scope Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4701 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4702 @subsection Parenthesis (Argument) List Symbols
4703 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4704
4705 A number of syntactic symbols are associated with parenthesis lists,
4706 a.k.a argument lists, as found in function declarations and function
4707 calls. This example illustrates these:
4708
4709 @example
4710 1: void a_function( int line1,
4711 2: int line2 );
4712 3:
4713 4: void a_longer_function(
4714 5: int line1,
4715 6: int line2
4716 7: );
4717 8:
4718 9: void call_them( int line1, int line2 )
4719 10: @{
4720 11: a_function(
4721 12: line1,
4722 13: line2
4723 14: );
4724 15:
4725 16: a_longer_function( line1,
4726 17: line2 );
4727 18: @}
4728 @end example
4729
4730 @ssindex arglist-intro
4731 @ssindex arglist-close
4732 Lines 5 and 12 are assigned @code{arglist-intro} syntax since they are
4733 the first line following the open parenthesis, and lines 7 and 14 are
4734 assigned @code{arglist-close} syntax since they contain the parenthesis
4735 that closes the argument list.
4736
4737 @ssindex arglist-cont-nonempty
4738 @ssindex arglist-cont
4739 Lines that continue argument lists can be assigned one of two syntactic
4740 symbols. For example, Lines 2 and 17
4741 are assigned @code{arglist-cont-nonempty} syntax. What this means
4742 is that they continue an argument list, but that the line containing the
4743 parenthesis that opens the list is @emph{not empty} following the open
4744 parenthesis. Contrast this against lines 6 and 13 which are assigned
4745 @code{arglist-cont} syntax. This is because the parenthesis that opens
4746 their argument lists is the last character on that line.
4747
4748 Syntactic elements with @code{arglist-intro},
4749 @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, and @code{arglist-close} contain two
4750 buffer positions: the anchor position (the beginning of the
4751 declaration or statement) and the position of the open parenthesis.
4752 The latter position can be used in a line-up function (@pxref{Line-Up
4753 Functions}).
4754
4755 Note that there is no @code{arglist-open} syntax. This is because any
4756 parenthesis that opens an argument list, appearing on a separate line,
4757 is assigned the @code{statement-cont} syntax instead.
4758
4759 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4760 @node Literal Symbols, Multiline Macro Symbols, Paren List Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4761 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4762 @subsection Comment String Label and Macro Symbols
4763 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4764
4765 A few miscellaneous syntactic symbols that haven't been previously
4766 covered are illustrated by this C++ example:
4767
4768 @example
4769 1: void Bass::play( int volume )
4770 2: const
4771 3: @{
4772 4: /* this line starts a multiline
4773 5: * comment. This line should get `c' syntax */
4774 6:
4775 7: char* a_multiline_string = "This line starts a multiline \
4776 8: string. This line should get `string' syntax.";
4777 9:
4778 10: note:
4779 11: @{
4780 12: #ifdef LOCK
4781 13: Lock acquire();
4782 14: #endif // LOCK
4783 15: slap_pop();
4784 16: cout << "I played "
4785 17: << "a note\n";
4786 18: @}
4787 19: @}
4788 @end example
4789
4790 The lines to note in this example include:
4791
4792 @itemize @bullet
4793 @item
4794 @ssindex func-decl-cont
4795 Line 2 is assigned the @code{func-decl-cont} syntax.
4796
4797 @item
4798 @ssindex comment-intro
4799 Line 4 is assigned both @code{defun-block-intro} @emph{and}
4800 @code{comment-intro} syntax. A syntactic element with
4801 @code{comment-intro} has no anchor point. It is always accompanied
4802 by another syntactic element which does have one.
4803
4804 @item
4805 @ssindex c
4806 Line 5 is assigned @code{c} syntax.
4807
4808 @item
4809 @cindex syntactic whitespace
4810 Line 6 which, even though it contains nothing but whitespace, is
4811 assigned @code{defun-block-intro}. Note that the appearance of the
4812 comment on lines 4 and 5 do not cause line 6 to be assigned
4813 @code{statement} syntax because comments are considered to be
4814 @dfn{syntactic whitespace}, which are ignored when analyzing
4815 code.
4816
4817 @item
4818 @ssindex string
4819 Line 8 is assigned @code{string} syntax.
4820
4821 @item
4822 @ssindex label
4823 Line 10 is assigned @code{label} syntax.
4824
4825 @item
4826 @ssindex block-open
4827 Line 11 is assigned @code{block-open} as well as @code{statement}
4828 syntax. A @code{block-open} syntactic element doesn't have an anchor
4829 position, since it always appears with another syntactic element which
4830 does have one.
4831
4832 @item
4833 @ssindex cpp-macro
4834 Lines 12 and 14 are assigned @code{cpp-macro} syntax in addition to the
4835 normal syntactic symbols (@code{statement-block-intro} and
4836 @code{statement}, respectively). Normally @code{cpp-macro} is
4837 configured to cancel out the normal syntactic context to make all
4838 preprocessor directives stick to the first column, but that's easily
4839 changed if you want preprocessor directives to be indented like the rest
4840 of the code. Like @code{comment-intro}, a syntactic element with
4841 @code{cpp-macro} doesn't contain an anchor position.
4842
4843 @item
4844 @ssindex stream-op
4845 Line 17 is assigned @code{stream-op} syntax.
4846 @end itemize
4847
4848 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4849 @node Multiline Macro Symbols, Objective-C Method Symbols, Literal Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4850 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4851 @subsection Multiline Macro Symbols
4852 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4853
4854 @cindex multiline macros
4855 @cindex syntactic whitespace
4856 @ssindex cpp-define-intro
4857 @ssindex cpp-macro-cont
4858 Multiline preprocessor macro definitions are normally handled just like
4859 other code, i.e., the lines inside them are indented according to the
4860 syntactic analysis of the preceding lines inside the macro. The first
4861 line inside a macro definition (i.e., the line after the starting line of
4862 the cpp directive itself) gets @code{cpp-define-intro}. In this example:
4863
4864 @example
4865 1: #define LIST_LOOP(cons, listp) \
4866 2: for (cons = listp; !NILP (cons); cons = XCDR (cons)) \
4867 3: if (!CONSP (cons)) \
4868 4: signal_error ("Invalid list format", listp); \
4869 5: else
4870 @end example
4871
4872 @noindent
4873 line 1 is given the syntactic symbol @code{cpp-macro}. The first line
4874 of a cpp directive is always given that symbol. Line 2 is given
4875 @code{cpp-define-intro}, so that you can give the macro body as a whole
4876 some extra indentation. Lines 3 through 5 are then analyzed as normal
4877 code, i.e., @code{substatement} on lines 3 and 4, and @code{else-clause}
4878 on line 5.
4879
4880 The syntactic analysis inside macros can be turned off with
4881 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} (@pxref{Custom Macros}). In
4882 that case, lines 2 through 5 would all be given @code{cpp-macro-cont}
4883 with an anchor position pointing to the @code{#} which starts the cpp
4884 directive@footnote{This is how @ccmode{} 5.28 and earlier analyzed
4885 macros.}.
4886
4887 @xref{Custom Macros}, for more info about the treatment of macros.
4888
4889 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4890 @node Objective-C Method Symbols, Java Symbols, Multiline Macro Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4891 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4892 @subsection Objective-C Method Symbols
4893 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4894
4895 In Objective-C buffers, there are three additional syntactic symbols
4896 assigned to various message calling constructs. Here's an example
4897 illustrating these:
4898
4899 @example
4900 1: - (void)setDelegate:anObject
4901 2: withStuff:stuff
4902 3: @{
4903 4: [delegate masterWillRebind:self
4904 5: toDelegate:anObject
4905 6: withExtraStuff:stuff];
4906 7: @}
4907 @end example
4908
4909 @ssindex objc-method-intro
4910 @ssindex objc-method-args-cont
4911 @ssindex objc-method-call-cont
4912 Here, line 1 is assigned @code{objc-method-intro} syntax, and line 2 is
4913 assigned @code{objc-method-args-cont} syntax. Lines 5 and 6 are both
4914 assigned @code{objc-method-call-cont} syntax.
4915
4916 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4917 @node Java Symbols, Statement Block Symbols, Objective-C Method Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4918 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4919 @subsection Java Symbols
4920 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4921
4922 Java has a concept of anonymous classes which can look something like
4923 this:
4924
4925 @example
4926 1: @@Test
4927 2: public void watch(Observable o) @{
4928 3: @@NonNull
4929 4: Observer obs = new Observer() @{
4930 5: public void update(Observable o, Object arg) @{
4931 6: history.addElement(arg);
4932 7: @}
4933 8: @};
4934 9: o.addObserver(obs);
4935 10: @}
4936 @end example
4937
4938 @ssindex inexpr-class
4939 The brace following the @code{new} operator opens the anonymous class.
4940 Lines 5 and 8 are assigned the @code{inexpr-class} syntax, besides the
4941 @code{inclass} symbol used in normal classes. Thus, the class will be
4942 indented just like a normal class, with the added indentation given to
4943 @code{inexpr-class}. An @code{inexpr-class} syntactic element doesn't
4944 have an anchor position.
4945
4946 @ssindex annotation-top-cont
4947 @ssindex annotation-var-cont
4948 Line 2 is assigned the @code{annotation-top-cont} syntax, due to it being a
4949 continuation of a topmost introduction with an annotation symbol preceding
4950 the current line. Similarly, line 4 is assigned the @code{annotation-var-cont}
4951 syntax due to it being a continuation of a variable declaration where preceding
4952 the declaration is an annotation.
4953
4954 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4955 @node Statement Block Symbols, K&R Symbols, Java Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4956 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4957 @subsection Statement Block Symbols
4958 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4959
4960 There are a few occasions where a statement block might be used inside
4961 an expression. One is in C or C++ code using the gcc extension for
4962 this, e.g:
4963
4964 @example
4965 1: int res = (@{
4966 2: int y = foo (); int z;
4967 3: if (y > 0) z = y; else z = - y;
4968 4: z;
4969 5: @});
4970 @end example
4971
4972 @ssindex inexpr-statement
4973 Lines 2 and 5 get the @code{inexpr-statement} syntax, besides the
4974 symbols they'd get in a normal block. Therefore, the indentation put on
4975 @code{inexpr-statement} is added to the normal statement block
4976 indentation. An @code{inexpr-statement} syntactic element doesn't
4977 contain an anchor position.
4978
4979 In Pike code, there are a few other situations where blocks occur inside
4980 statements, as illustrated here:
4981
4982 @example
4983 1: array itgob()
4984 2: @{
4985 3: string s = map (backtrace()[-2][3..],
4986 4: lambda
4987 5: (mixed arg)
4988 6: @{
4989 7: return sprintf ("%t", arg);
4990 8: @}) * ", " + "\n";
4991 9: return catch @{
4992 10: write (s + "\n");
4993 11: @};
4994 12: @}
4995 @end example
4996
4997 @ssindex inlambda
4998 @ssindex lambda-intro-cont
4999 Lines 4 through 8 contain a lambda function, which @ccmode{} recognizes
5000 by the @code{lambda} keyword. If the function argument list is put
5001 on a line of its own, as in line 5, it gets the @code{lambda-intro-cont}
5002 syntax. The function body is handled as an inline method body, with the
5003 addition of the @code{inlambda} syntactic symbol. This means that line
5004 6 gets @code{inlambda} and @code{inline-open}, and line 8 gets
5005 @code{inline-close}@footnote{You might wonder why it doesn't get
5006 @code{inlambda} too. It's because the closing brace is relative to the
5007 opening brace, which stands on its own line in this example. If the
5008 opening brace was hanging on the previous line, then the closing brace
5009 would get the @code{inlambda} syntax too to be indented correctly.}.
5010
5011 @ssindex inexpr-statement
5012 On line 9, @code{catch} is a special function taking a statement block
5013 as its argument. The block is handled as an in-expression statement
5014 with the @code{inexpr-statement} syntax, just like the gcc extended C
5015 example above. The other similar special function, @code{gauge}, is
5016 handled like this too.
5017
5018 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5019 @node K&R Symbols, , Statement Block Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
5020 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5021 @subsection K&R Symbols
5022 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5023
5024 @ssindex knr-argdecl-intro
5025 @ssindex knr-argdecl
5026 Two other syntactic symbols can appear in old style, non-prototyped C
5027 code @footnote{a.k.a.@: K&R C, or Kernighan & Ritchie C}:
5028
5029 @example
5030 1: int add_three_integers(a, b, c)
5031 2: int a;
5032 3: int b;
5033 4: int c;
5034 5: @{
5035 6: return a + b + c;
5036 7: @}
5037 @end example
5038
5039 Here, line 2 is the first line in an argument declaration list and so is
5040 given the @code{knr-argdecl-intro} syntactic symbol. Subsequent lines
5041 (i.e., lines 3 and 4 in this example), are given @code{knr-argdecl}
5042 syntax.
5043
5044
5045 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5046 @node Indentation Calculation, , Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Engine Basics
5047 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5048 @section Indentation Calculation
5049 @cindex indentation
5050 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5051
5052 Indentation for a line is calculated from the syntactic context
5053 (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}).
5054
5055 First, a buffer position is found whose column will be the base for the
5056 indentation calculation. It's the anchor position in the first
5057 syntactic element that provides one that is used. If no syntactic
5058 element has an anchor position then column zero is used.
5059
5060 Second, the syntactic symbols in each syntactic element are looked up
5061 in the @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable
5062 (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}), which is an association list of syntactic
5063 symbols and the offsets to apply for those symbols. These offsets are
5064 added together with the base column to produce the new indentation
5065 column.
5066
5067 Let's use our two code examples above to see how this works. Here is
5068 our first example again:
5069
5070 @example
5071 1: void swap( int& a, int& b )
5072 2: @{
5073 3: int tmp = a;
5074 4: a = b;
5075 5: b = tmp;
5076 6: @}
5077 @end example
5078
5079 Let's say point is on line 3 and we hit the @key{TAB} key to reindent
5080 the line. The syntactic context for that line is:
5081
5082 @example
5083 ((defun-block-intro 29))
5084 @end example
5085
5086 @noindent
5087 Since buffer position 29 is the first and only anchor position in the
5088 list, @ccmode{} goes there and asks for the current column. This brace
5089 is in column zero, so @ccmode{} uses @samp{0} as the base column.
5090
5091 Next, @ccmode{} looks up @code{defun-block-intro} in the
5092 @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable. Let's say it finds the value
5093 @samp{4}; it adds this to the base column @samp{0}, yielding a running
5094 total indentation of 4 spaces.
5095
5096 Since there is only one syntactic element on the list for this line,
5097 indentation calculation is complete, and the total indentation for the
5098 line is 4 spaces.
5099
5100 Here's another example:
5101
5102 @example
5103 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5104 2: @{
5105 3: if( doit )
5106 4: @{
5107 5: return( val + incr );
5108 6: @}
5109 7: return( val );
5110 8: @}
5111 @end example
5112
5113 If we were to hit @kbd{TAB} on line 4 in the above example, the same
5114 basic process is performed, despite the differences in the syntactic
5115 context. The context for this line is:
5116
5117 @example
5118 ((substatement-open 46))
5119 @end example
5120
5121 Here, @ccmode{} goes to buffer position 46, which is the @samp{i} in
5122 @code{if} on line 3. This character is in the fourth column on that
5123 line so the base column is @samp{4}. Then @ccmode{} looks up the
5124 @code{substatement-open} symbol in @code{c-offsets-alist}. Let's say it
5125 finds the value @samp{4}. It's added with the base column and yields an
5126 indentation for the line of 8 spaces.
5127
5128 Simple, huh?
5129
5130 Actually, it's a bit more complicated than that since the entries on
5131 @code{c-offsets-alist} can be much more than plain offsets.
5132 @xref{c-offsets-alist}, for the full story.
5133
5134 Anyway, the mode usually just does The Right Thing without you having to
5135 think about it in this much detail. But when customizing indentation,
5136 it's helpful to understand the general indentation model being used.
5137
5138 As you configure @ccmode{}, you might want to set the variable
5139 @code{c-echo-syntactic-information-p} to non-@code{nil} so that the
5140 syntactic context and calculated offset always is echoed in the
5141 minibuffer when you hit @kbd{TAB}.
5142
5143
5144 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5145 @node Customizing Indentation, Custom Macros, Indentation Engine Basics, Top
5146 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5147 @chapter Customizing Indentation
5148 @cindex customization, indentation
5149 @cindex indentation
5150 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5151
5152 The principal variable for customizing indentation is the style
5153 variable @code{c-offsets-alist}, which gives an @dfn{offset} (an
5154 indentation rule) for each syntactic symbol. Its structure and
5155 semantics are completely described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. The
5156 various ways you can set the variable, including the use of the
5157 @ccmode{} style system, are described in @ref{Config Basics} and its
5158 sections, in particular @ref{Style Variables}.
5159
5160 The simplest and most used kind of ``offset'' setting in
5161 @code{c-offsets-alist} is in terms of multiples of
5162 @code{c-basic-offset}:
5163
5164 @defopt c-basic-offset
5165 @vindex basic-offset (c-)
5166 This style variable holds the basic offset between indentation levels.
5167 It's factory default is 4, but all the built-in styles set it
5168 themselves, to some value between 2 (for @code{gnu} style) and 8 (for
5169 @code{bsd}, @code{linux}, and @code{python} styles).
5170 @end defopt
5171
5172 The most flexible ``offset'' setting you can make in
5173 @code{c-offsets-alist} is a line-up function (or even a list of them),
5174 either one supplied by @ccmode{} (@pxref{Line-Up Functions}) or one
5175 you write yourself (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}).
5176
5177 Finally, in @ref{Other Indentation} you'll find the tool of last
5178 resort: a hook which is called after a line has been indented. You
5179 can install functions here to make ad-hoc adjustments to any line's
5180 indentation.
5181
5182 @menu
5183 * c-offsets-alist::
5184 * Interactive Customization::
5185 * Line-Up Functions::
5186 * Custom Line-Up::
5187 * Other Indentation::
5188 @end menu
5189
5190
5191 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5192 @node c-offsets-alist, Interactive Customization, Customizing Indentation, Customizing Indentation
5193 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5194 @section c-offsets-alist
5195 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5196
5197 This section explains the structure and semantics of the style
5198 variable @code{c-offsets-alist}, the principal variable for configuring
5199 indentation. Details of how to set it up, and its relationship to
5200 @ccmode{}'s style system are given in @ref{Style Variables}.
5201
5202 @defopt c-offsets-alist
5203 @vindex offsets-alist (c-)
5204 This is an alist which associates an offset with each syntactic
5205 symbol. This @dfn{offset} is a rule specifying how to indent a line
5206 whose syntactic context matches the symbol. @xref{Syntactic
5207 Analysis}.
5208
5209 Note that the buffer-local binding of this alist in a @ccmode{} buffer
5210 contains an entry for @emph{every} syntactic symbol. Its global
5211 binding and its settings within style specifications usually contain
5212 only a few entries. @xref{Style Variables}.
5213
5214 The offset specification associated with any particular syntactic
5215 symbol can be an integer, a variable name, a vector, a function or
5216 lambda expression, a list, or one of the following special symbols:
5217 @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{++}, @code{--}, @code{*}, or @code{/}. The
5218 meanings of these values are described in detail below.
5219
5220 Here is an example fragment of a @code{c-offsets-alist}, showing some
5221 of these kinds of offsets:
5222
5223 @example
5224 ((statement . 0)
5225 (substatement . +)
5226 (cpp-macro . [0])
5227 (topmost-intro-cont . c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont)
5228 (statement-block-intro . (add c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block
5229 c-indent-multi-line-block))
5230 @dots{}
5231 @*)
5232 @end example
5233 @end defopt
5234
5235 @deffn Command c-set-offset (@kbd{C-c C-o})
5236 @findex set-offset (c-)
5237 @kindex C-c C-o
5238 This command changes the entry for a syntactic symbol in the current
5239 binding of @code{c-offsets-alist}, or it inserts a new entry if there
5240 isn't already one for that syntactic symbol.
5241
5242 You can use @code{c-set-offsets} interactively within a @ccmode{}
5243 buffer to make experimental changes to your indentation settings.
5244 @kbd{C-c C-o} prompts you for the syntactic symbol to change
5245 (defaulting to that of the current line) and the new offset
5246 (defaulting to the current offset).
5247
5248 @code{c-set-offsets} takes two arguments when used programmatically:
5249 @var{symbol}, the syntactic element symbol to change and @var{offset},
5250 the new offset for that syntactic element. You can call the command
5251 in your @file{.emacs} to change the global binding of
5252 @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{Style Variables}); you can use it in a
5253 hook function to make changes from the current style. @ccmode{}
5254 itself uses this function when initializing styles.
5255 @end deffn
5256
5257 @cindex offset specification
5258 The ``offset specifications'' in @code{c-offsets-alist} can be any of
5259 the following:
5260
5261 @table @asis
5262 @item An integer
5263 The integer specifies a relative offset. All relative
5264 offsets@footnote{The syntactic context @code{@w{((defun-block-intro
5265 2724) (comment-intro))}} would likely have two relative offsets.} will
5266 be added together and used to calculate the indentation relative to an
5267 anchor position earlier in the buffer. @xref{Indentation
5268 Calculation}, for details. Most of the time, it's probably better to
5269 use one of the special symbols like @code{+} than an integer (apart
5270 from zero).
5271
5272 @item One of the symbols @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{++}, @code{--}, @code{*}, or @code{/}
5273 These special symbols describe a relative offset in multiples of
5274 @code{c-basic-offset}:
5275
5276 By defining a style's indentation in terms of @code{c-basic-offset},
5277 you can change the amount of whitespace given to an indentation level
5278 while maintaining the same basic shape of your code. Here are the
5279 values that the special symbols correspond to:
5280
5281 @table @code
5282 @item +
5283 @code{c-basic-offset} times 1
5284 @item -
5285 @code{c-basic-offset} times @minus{}1
5286 @item ++
5287 @code{c-basic-offset} times 2
5288 @item --
5289 @code{c-basic-offset} times @minus{}2
5290 @item *
5291 @code{c-basic-offset} times 0.5
5292 @item /
5293 @code{c-basic-offset} times @minus{}0.5
5294 @end table
5295
5296 @item A vector
5297 The first element of the vector, an integer, sets the absolute
5298 indentation column. This will override any previously calculated
5299 indentation, but won't override relative indentation calculated from
5300 syntactic elements later on in the syntactic context of the line being
5301 indented. @xref{Indentation Calculation}. Any elements in the vector
5302 beyond the first will be ignored.
5303
5304 @item A function or lambda expression
5305 The function will be called and its return value will in turn be
5306 evaluated as an offset specification. Functions are useful when more
5307 context than just the syntactic symbol is needed to get the desired
5308 indentation. @xref{Line-Up Functions}, and @ref{Custom Line-Up}, for
5309 details about them.
5310
5311 @item A symbol with a variable binding
5312 If the symbol also has a function binding, the function takes
5313 precedence over the variable. Otherwise the value of the variable is
5314 used. It must be an integer (which is used as relative offset) or a
5315 vector (an absolute offset).
5316
5317 @item A list
5318 The offset can also be a list containing several offset
5319 specifications; these are evaluated recursively and combined. A list
5320 is typically only useful when some of the offsets are line-up
5321 functions. A common strategy is calling a sequence of functions in
5322 turn until one of them recognizes that it is appropriate for the
5323 source line and returns a non-@code{nil} value.
5324
5325 @code{nil} values are always ignored when the offsets are combined.
5326 The first element of the list specifies the method of combining the
5327 non-@code{nil} offsets from the remaining elements:
5328
5329 @table @code
5330 @item first
5331 Use the first offset that doesn't evaluate to @code{nil}. Subsequent
5332 elements of the list don't get evaluated.
5333 @item min
5334 Use the minimum of all the offsets. All must be either relative or
5335 absolute; they can't be mixed.
5336 @item max
5337 Use the maximum of all the offsets. All must be either relative or
5338 absolute; they can't be mixed.
5339 @item add
5340 Add all the evaluated offsets together. Exactly one of them may be
5341 absolute, in which case the result is absolute. Any relative offsets
5342 that preceded the absolute one in the list will be ignored in that case.
5343 @end table
5344
5345 As a compatibility measure, if the first element is none of the above
5346 then it too will be taken as an offset specification and the whole list
5347 will be combined according to the method @code{first}.
5348 @end table
5349
5350 @vindex c-strict-syntax-p
5351 @vindex strict-syntax-p (c-)
5352 If an offset specification evaluates to @code{nil}, then a relative
5353 offset of 0 (zero) is used@footnote{There is however a variable
5354 @code{c-strict-syntax-p} that when set to non-@code{nil} will cause an
5355 error to be signaled in that case. It's now considered obsolete since
5356 it doesn't work well with some of the alignment functions that return
5357 @code{nil} instead of zero. You should therefore leave
5358 @code{c-strict-syntax-p} set to @code{nil}.}.
5359
5360 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5361 @node Interactive Customization, Line-Up Functions, c-offsets-alist, Customizing Indentation
5362 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5363 @section Interactive Customization
5364 @cindex customization, interactive
5365 @cindex interactive customization
5366 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5367
5368 As an example of how to customize indentation, let's change the
5369 style of this example@footnote{In this and subsequent examples, the
5370 original code is formatted using the @samp{gnu} style unless otherwise
5371 indicated. @xref{Styles}.}:
5372
5373 @example
5374 @group
5375 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5376 2: @{
5377 3: if( doit )
5378 4: @{
5379 5: return( val + incr );
5380 6: @}
5381 7: return( val );
5382 8: @}
5383 @end group
5384 @end example
5385
5386 @noindent
5387 to:
5388
5389 @example
5390 @group
5391 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5392 2: @{
5393 3: if( doit )
5394 4: @{
5395 5: return( val + incr );
5396 6: @}
5397 7: return( val );
5398 8: @}
5399 @end group
5400 @end example
5401
5402 In other words, we want to change the indentation of braces that open a
5403 block following a condition so that the braces line up under the
5404 conditional, instead of being indented. Notice that the construct we
5405 want to change starts on line 4. To change the indentation of a line,
5406 we need to see which syntactic symbols affect the offset calculations
5407 for that line. Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 4 yields:
5408
5409 @example
5410 ((substatement-open 44))
5411 @end example
5412
5413 @noindent
5414 so we know that to change the offset of the open brace, we need to
5415 change the indentation for the @code{substatement-open} syntactic
5416 symbol.
5417
5418 To do this interactively, just hit @kbd{C-c C-o}. This prompts
5419 you for the syntactic symbol to change, providing a reasonable default.
5420 In this case, the default is @code{substatement-open}, which is just the
5421 syntactic symbol we want to change!
5422
5423 After you hit return, @ccmode{} will then prompt you for the new
5424 offset value, with the old value as the default. The default in this
5425 case is @samp{+}, but we want no extra indentation so enter
5426 @samp{0} and @kbd{RET}. This will associate the offset 0 with the
5427 syntactic symbol @code{substatement-open}.
5428
5429 To check your changes quickly, just hit @kbd{C-c C-q}
5430 (@code{c-indent-defun}) to reindent the entire function. The example
5431 should now look like:
5432
5433 @example
5434 @group
5435 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5436 2: @{
5437 3: if( doit )
5438 4: @{
5439 5: return( val + incr );
5440 6: @}
5441 7: return( val );
5442 8: @}
5443 @end group
5444 @end example
5445
5446 Notice how just changing the open brace offset on line 4 is all we
5447 needed to do. Since the other affected lines are indented relative to
5448 line 4, they are automatically indented the way you'd expect. For more
5449 complicated examples, this might not always work. The general approach
5450 to take is to always start adjusting offsets for lines higher up in the
5451 file, then reindent and see if any following lines need further
5452 adjustments.
5453
5454 @c Move this bit to "Styles" (2005/10/7)
5455 @deffn Command c-set-offset symbol offset
5456 @findex set-offset (c-)
5457 @kindex C-c C-o
5458 This is the command bound to @kbd{C-c C-o}. It provides a convenient
5459 way to set offsets on @code{c-offsets-alist} both interactively (see
5460 the example above) and from your mode hook.
5461
5462 It takes two arguments when used programmatically: @var{symbol} is the
5463 syntactic element symbol to change and @var{offset} is the new offset
5464 for that syntactic element.
5465 @end deffn
5466 @c End of MOVE THIS BIT.
5467
5468 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5469 @node Line-Up Functions, Custom Line-Up, Interactive Customization, Customizing Indentation
5470 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5471 @section Line-Up Functions
5472 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5473
5474 @cindex line-up function
5475 @cindex indentation function
5476 Often there are cases when a simple offset setting on a syntactic
5477 symbol isn't enough to get the desired indentation---for example, you
5478 might want to line up a closing parenthesis with the matching opening
5479 one rather than indenting relative to its ``anchor point''. @ccmode{}
5480 provides this flexibility with @dfn{line-up functions}.
5481
5482 The way you associate a line-up function with a syntactic symbol is
5483 described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. @ccmode{} comes with many
5484 predefined line-up functions for common situations. If none of these
5485 does what you want, you can write your own. @xref{Custom Line-Up}.
5486 Sometimes, it is easier to tweak the standard indentation by adding a
5487 function to @code{c-special-indent-hook} (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
5488
5489 The line-up functions haven't been adapted for AWK buffers or tested
5490 with them. Some of them might work serendipitously. There shouldn't be
5491 any problems writing custom line-up functions for AWK mode.
5492
5493 The calling convention for line-up functions is described fully in
5494 @ref{Custom Line-Up}. Roughly speaking, the return value is either an
5495 offset itself (such as @code{+} or @code{[0]}) or it's @code{nil},
5496 meaning ``this function is inappropriate in this case; try a
5497 different one''. @xref{c-offsets-alist}.
5498
5499 The subsections below describe all the standard line-up functions,
5500 categorized by the sort of token the lining-up centers around. For
5501 each of these functions there is a ``works with'' list that indicates
5502 which syntactic symbols the function is intended to be used with.
5503
5504 @macro workswith
5505 @emph{Works with:@ }
5506 @end macro
5507 @ifinfo
5508 @unmacro workswith
5509 @macro workswith
5510 Works with:
5511 @end macro
5512 @end ifinfo
5513
5514 @macro sssTBasicOffset
5515 <--> @i{c-basic-offset}@c
5516 @end macro
5517
5518 @macro sssTsssTBasicOffset
5519 <--><--> @i{c-basic-offset}@c
5520 @end macro
5521
5522 @macro hereFn{func}
5523 <- @i{\func\}@c
5524 @end macro
5525
5526 @c The TeX backend seems to insert extra spaces around the argument. :P
5527 @iftex
5528 @unmacro hereFn
5529 @macro hereFn{func}
5530 <-@i{\func\}@c
5531 @end macro
5532 @end iftex
5533
5534 @menu
5535 * Brace/Paren Line-Up::
5536 * List Line-Up::
5537 * Operator Line-Up::
5538 * Comment Line-Up::
5539 * Misc Line-Up::
5540 @end menu
5541
5542 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5543 @node Brace/Paren Line-Up, List Line-Up, Line-Up Functions, Line-Up Functions
5544 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5545 @subsection Brace and Parenthesis Line-Up Functions
5546 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5547
5548 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for braces,
5549 parentheses and statements within brace blocks.
5550
5551 @defun c-lineup-close-paren
5552 @findex lineup-close-paren (c-)
5553 Line up the closing paren under its corresponding open paren if the
5554 open paren is followed by code. If the open paren ends its line, no
5555 indentation is added. E.g:
5556
5557 @example
5558 @group
5559 main (int,
5560 char **
5561 ) @hereFn{c-lineup-close-paren}
5562 @end group
5563 @end example
5564
5565 @noindent
5566 and
5567
5568 @example
5569 @group
5570 main (
5571 int, char **
5572 ) @hereFn{c-lineup-close-paren}
5573 @end group
5574 @end example
5575
5576 As a special case, if a brace block is opened at the same line as the
5577 open parenthesis of the argument list, the indentation is
5578 @code{c-basic-offset} instead of the open paren column. See
5579 @code{c-lineup-arglist} for further discussion of this ``DWIM'' measure.
5580
5581 @workswith All @code{*-close} symbols.
5582 @end defun
5583
5584 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5585
5586 @anchor{c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren}
5587 @defun c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren
5588 @findex lineup-arglist-close-under-paren (c-)
5589 Set your @code{arglist-close} syntactic symbol to this line-up function
5590 so that parentheses that close argument lists will line up under the
5591 parenthesis that opened the argument list. It can also be used with
5592 @code{arglist-cont} and @code{arglist-cont-nonempty} to line up all
5593 lines inside a parenthesis under the open paren.
5594
5595 As a special case, if a brace block is opened at the same line as the
5596 open parenthesis of the argument list, the indentation is
5597 @code{c-basic-offset} only. See @code{c-lineup-arglist} for further
5598 discussion of this ``DWIM'' measure.
5599
5600 @workswith Almost all symbols, but are typically most useful on
5601 @code{arglist-close}, @code{brace-list-close}, @code{arglist-cont} and
5602 @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
5603 @end defun
5604
5605 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5606
5607 @defun c-indent-one-line-block
5608 @findex indent-one-line-block (c-)
5609 Indent a one line block @code{c-basic-offset} extra. E.g:
5610
5611 @example
5612 @group
5613 if (n > 0)
5614 @{m+=n; n=0;@} @hereFn{c-indent-one-line-block}
5615 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5616 @end group
5617 @end example
5618
5619 @noindent
5620 and
5621
5622 @example
5623 @group
5624 if (n > 0)
5625 @{ @hereFn{c-indent-one-line-block}
5626 m+=n; n=0;
5627 @}
5628 @end group
5629 @end example
5630
5631 The block may be surrounded by any kind of parenthesis characters.
5632 @code{nil} is returned if the line doesn't start with a one line block,
5633 which makes the function usable in list expressions.
5634
5635 @workswith Almost all syntactic symbols, but most useful on the
5636 @code{-open} symbols.
5637 @end defun
5638
5639 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5640
5641 @defun c-indent-multi-line-block
5642 @findex indent-multi-line-block (c-)
5643 Indent a multiline block @code{c-basic-offset} extra. E.g:
5644
5645 @example
5646 @group
5647 int *foo[] = @{
5648 NULL,
5649 @{17@}, @hereFn{c-indent-multi-line-block}
5650 @end group
5651 @end example
5652
5653 @noindent
5654 and
5655
5656 @example
5657 @group
5658 int *foo[] = @{
5659 NULL,
5660 @{ @hereFn{c-indent-multi-line-block}
5661 17
5662 @},
5663 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5664 @end group
5665 @end example
5666
5667 The block may be surrounded by any kind of parenthesis characters.
5668 @code{nil} is returned if the line doesn't start with a multiline
5669 block, which makes the function usable in list expressions.
5670
5671 @workswith Almost all syntactic symbols, but most useful on the
5672 @code{-open} symbols.
5673 @end defun
5674
5675 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5676
5677 @defun c-lineup-runin-statements
5678 @findex lineup-runin-statements (c-)
5679 Line up statements for coding standards which place the first statement
5680 in a block on the same line as the block opening brace@footnote{Run-in
5681 style doesn't really work too well. You might need to write your own
5682 custom line-up functions to better support this style.}. E.g:
5683
5684 @example
5685 @group
5686 int main()
5687 @{ puts ("Hello!");
5688 return 0; @hereFn{c-lineup-runin-statements}
5689 @}
5690 @end group
5691 @end example
5692
5693 If there is no statement after the opening brace to align with,
5694 @code{nil} is returned. This makes the function usable in list
5695 expressions.
5696
5697 @workswith The @code{statement} syntactic symbol.
5698 @end defun
5699
5700 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5701
5702 @defun c-lineup-inexpr-block
5703 @findex lineup-inexpr-block (c-)
5704 This can be used with the in-expression block symbols to indent the
5705 whole block to the column where the construct is started. E.g., for Java
5706 anonymous classes, this lines up the class under the @samp{new} keyword,
5707 and in Pike it lines up the lambda function body under the @samp{lambda}
5708 keyword. Returns @code{nil} if the block isn't part of such a
5709 construct.
5710
5711 @workswith @code{inlambda}, @code{inexpr-statement},
5712 @code{inexpr-class}.
5713 @end defun
5714
5715 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5716
5717 @defun c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks
5718 @findex lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks (c-)
5719 Compensate for Whitesmith style indentation of blocks. Due to the way
5720 @ccmode{} calculates anchor positions for normal lines inside blocks,
5721 this function is necessary for those lines to get correct Whitesmith
5722 style indentation. Consider the following examples:
5723
5724 @example
5725 @group
5726 int foo()
5727 @{
5728 a;
5729 x; @hereFn{c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks}
5730 @end group
5731 @end example
5732
5733 @example
5734 @group
5735 int foo()
5736 @{
5737 @{
5738 a;
5739 @}
5740 x; @hereFn{c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks}
5741 @end group
5742 @end example
5743
5744 The fact that the line with @code{x} is preceded by a Whitesmith style
5745 indented block in the latter case and not the first should not affect
5746 its indentation. But since CC Mode in cases like this uses the
5747 indentation of the preceding statement as anchor position, the @code{x}
5748 would in the second case be indented too much if the offset for
5749 @code{statement} was set simply to zero.
5750
5751 This lineup function corrects for this situation by detecting if the
5752 anchor position is at an open paren character. In that case, it instead
5753 indents relative to the surrounding block just like
5754 @code{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}.
5755
5756 @workswith @code{brace-list-entry}, @code{brace-entry-open},
5757 @code{statement}, @code{arglist-cont}.
5758 @end defun
5759
5760 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5761
5762 @defun c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block
5763 @findex lineup-whitesmith-in-block (c-)
5764 Line up lines inside a block in Whitesmith style. It's done in a way
5765 that works both when the opening brace hangs and when it doesn't. E.g:
5766
5767 @example
5768 @group
5769 something
5770 @{
5771 foo; @hereFn{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}
5772 @}
5773 @end group
5774 @end example
5775
5776 @noindent
5777 and
5778
5779 @example
5780 @group
5781 something @{
5782 foo; @hereFn{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}
5783 @}
5784 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5785 @end group
5786 @end example
5787
5788 In the first case the indentation is kept unchanged, in the second
5789 @code{c-basic-offset} is added.
5790
5791 @workswith @code{defun-close}, @code{defun-block-intro},
5792 @code{inline-close}, @code{block-close}, @code{brace-list-close},
5793 @code{brace-list-intro}, @code{statement-block-intro},
5794 @code{arglist-intro}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty},
5795 @code{arglist-close}, and all @code{in*} symbols, e.g., @code{inclass}
5796 and @code{inextern-lang}.
5797 @end defun
5798
5799 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5800 @node List Line-Up, Operator Line-Up, Brace/Paren Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
5801 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5802 @subsection List Line-Up Functions
5803 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5804
5805 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for lines which
5806 form lists of items, usually separated by commas.
5807
5808 The function @ref{c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren}, which is mainly
5809 for indenting a close parenthesis, is also useful for the lines
5810 contained within parentheses.
5811
5812 @defun c-lineup-arglist
5813 @findex lineup-arglist (c-)
5814 Line up the current argument line under the first argument.
5815
5816 As a special case, if an argument on the same line as the open
5817 parenthesis starts with a brace block opener, the indentation is
5818 @code{c-basic-offset} only. This is intended as a ``DWIM'' measure in
5819 cases like macros that contain statement blocks, e.g:
5820
5821 @example
5822 @group
5823 A_VERY_LONG_MACRO_NAME (@{
5824 some (code, with + long, lines * in[it]);
5825 @});
5826 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5827 @end group
5828 @end example
5829
5830 This is motivated partly because it's more in line with how code
5831 blocks are handled, and partly since it approximates the behavior of
5832 earlier CC Mode versions, which due to inaccurate analysis tended to
5833 indent such cases this way.
5834
5835 @workswith @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, @code{arglist-close}.
5836 @end defun
5837
5838 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5839
5840 @defun c-lineup-arglist-intro-after-paren
5841 @findex lineup-arglist-intro-after-paren (c-)
5842 Line up a line to just after the open paren of the surrounding paren or
5843 brace block.
5844
5845 @workswith @code{defun-block-intro}, @code{brace-list-intro},
5846 @code{statement-block-intro}, @code{statement-case-intro},
5847 @code{arglist-intro}.
5848 @end defun
5849
5850 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5851
5852 @defun c-lineup-multi-inher
5853 @findex lineup-multi-inher (c-)
5854 Line up the classes in C++ multiple inheritance clauses and member
5855 initializers under each other. E.g:
5856
5857 @example
5858 @group
5859 Foo::Foo (int a, int b):
5860 Cyphr (a),
5861 Bar (b) @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
5862 @end group
5863 @end example
5864
5865 @noindent
5866 and
5867
5868 @example
5869 @group
5870 class Foo
5871 : public Cyphr,
5872 public Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
5873 @end group
5874 @end example
5875
5876 @noindent
5877 and
5878
5879 @example
5880 @group
5881 Foo::Foo (int a, int b)
5882 : Cyphr (a)
5883 , Bar (b) @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
5884 @end group
5885 @end example
5886
5887 @workswith @code{inher-cont}, @code{member-init-cont}.
5888 @end defun
5889
5890 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5891
5892 @defun c-lineup-java-inher
5893 @findex lineup-java-inher (c-)
5894 Line up Java implements and extends declarations. If class names
5895 follow on the same line as the @samp{implements}/@samp{extends}
5896 keyword, they are lined up under each other. Otherwise, they are
5897 indented by adding @code{c-basic-offset} to the column of the keyword.
5898 E.g:
5899
5900 @example
5901 @group
5902 class Foo
5903 extends
5904 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-inher}
5905 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5906 @end group
5907 @end example
5908
5909 @noindent
5910 and
5911
5912 @example
5913 @group
5914 class Foo
5915 extends Cyphr,
5916 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-inher}
5917 @end group
5918 @end example
5919
5920 @workswith @code{inher-cont}.
5921 @end defun
5922
5923 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5924
5925 @defun c-lineup-java-throws
5926 @findex lineup-java-throws (c-)
5927 Line up Java throws declarations. If exception names follow on the
5928 same line as the throws keyword, they are lined up under each other.
5929 Otherwise, they are indented by adding @code{c-basic-offset} to the
5930 column of the @samp{throws} keyword. The @samp{throws} keyword itself
5931 is also indented by @code{c-basic-offset} from the function declaration
5932 start if it doesn't hang. E.g:
5933
5934 @example
5935 @group
5936 int foo()
5937 throws @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5938 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5939 @sssTsssTBasicOffset{}
5940 @end group
5941 @end example
5942
5943 @noindent
5944 and
5945
5946 @example
5947 @group
5948 int foo() throws Cyphr,
5949 Bar, @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5950 Vlod @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5951 @end group
5952 @end example
5953
5954 @workswith @code{func-decl-cont}.
5955 @end defun
5956
5957 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5958
5959 @defun c-lineup-template-args
5960 @findex lineup-template-args (c-)
5961 Line up the arguments of a template argument list under each other, but
5962 only in the case where the first argument is on the same line as the
5963 opening @samp{<}.
5964
5965 To allow this function to be used in a list expression, @code{nil} is
5966 returned if there's no template argument on the first line.
5967
5968 @workswith @code{template-args-cont}.
5969 @end defun
5970
5971 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5972
5973 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-call
5974 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-call (c-)
5975 For Objective-C code, line up selector args as Emacs Lisp mode does
5976 with function args: go to the position right after the message receiver,
5977 and if you are at the end of the line, indent the current line
5978 c-basic-offset columns from the opening bracket; otherwise you are
5979 looking at the first character of the first method call argument, so
5980 lineup the current line with it.
5981
5982 @workswith @code{objc-method-call-cont}.
5983 @end defun
5984
5985 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5986
5987 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-args
5988 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-args (c-)
5989 For Objective-C code, line up the colons that separate args. The colon
5990 on the current line is aligned with the one on the first line.
5991
5992 @workswith @code{objc-method-args-cont}.
5993 @end defun
5994
5995 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5996
5997 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-args-2
5998 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-args-2 (c-)
5999 Similar to @code{c-lineup-ObjC-method-args} but lines up the colon on
6000 the current line with the colon on the previous line.
6001
6002 @workswith @code{objc-method-args-cont}.
6003 @end defun
6004
6005 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6006 @node Operator Line-Up, Comment Line-Up, List Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
6007 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6008 @subsection Operator Line-Up Functions
6009 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6010
6011 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for lines which
6012 start with an operator, by lining it up with something on the previous
6013 line.
6014
6015 @defun c-lineup-argcont
6016 @findex lineup-argcont (c-)
6017 Line up a continued argument. E.g:
6018
6019 @example
6020 @group
6021 foo (xyz, aaa + bbb + ccc
6022 + ddd + eee + fff); @hereFn{c-lineup-argcont}
6023 @end group
6024 @end example
6025
6026 Only continuation lines like this are touched, @code{nil} is returned on
6027 lines which are the start of an argument.
6028
6029 Within a gcc @code{asm} block, @code{:} is recognized as an argument
6030 separator, but of course only between operand specifications, not in the
6031 expressions for the operands.
6032
6033 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6034 @end defun
6035
6036 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6037
6038 @defun c-lineup-arglist-operators
6039 @findex lineup-arglist-operators (c-)
6040 Line up lines starting with an infix operator under the open paren.
6041 Return @code{nil} on lines that don't start with an operator, to leave
6042 those cases to other line-up functions. Example:
6043
6044 @example
6045 @group
6046 if ( x < 10
6047 || at_limit (x, @hereFn{c-lineup-arglist-operators}
6048 list) @hereFn{c-lineup-arglist-operators@r{ returns nil}}
6049 )
6050 @end group
6051 @end example
6052
6053 Since this function doesn't do anything for lines without an infix
6054 operator you typically want to use it together with some other lineup
6055 settings, e.g., as follows (the @code{arglist-close} setting is just a
6056 suggestion to get a consistent style):
6057
6058 @example
6059 (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont
6060 '(c-lineup-arglist-operators 0))
6061 (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont-nonempty
6062 '(c-lineup-arglist-operators c-lineup-arglist))
6063 (c-set-offset 'arglist-close
6064 '(c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren))
6065 @end example
6066
6067 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6068 @end defun
6069
6070 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6071
6072 @defun c-lineup-assignments
6073 @findex lineup-assignments (c-)
6074 Line up the current line after the assignment operator on the first line
6075 in the statement. If there isn't any, return nil to allow stacking with
6076 other line-up functions. If the current line contains an assignment
6077 operator too, try to align it with the first one.
6078
6079 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6080 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6081
6082 @end defun
6083
6084 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6085
6086 @defun c-lineup-math
6087 @findex lineup-math (c-)
6088 Like @code{c-lineup-assignments} but indent with @code{c-basic-offset}
6089 if no assignment operator was found on the first line. I.e., this
6090 function is the same as specifying a list @code{(c-lineup-assignments
6091 +)}. It's provided for compatibility with old configurations.
6092
6093 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6094 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6095 @end defun
6096
6097 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6098
6099 @defun c-lineup-cascaded-calls
6100 @findex lineup-cascaded-calls (c-)
6101 Line up ``cascaded calls'' under each other. If the line begins with
6102 @code{->} or @code{.} and the preceding line ends with one or more
6103 function calls preceded by the same token, then the arrow is lined up
6104 with the first of those tokens. E.g:
6105
6106 @example
6107 @group
6108 r = proc->add(17)->add(18)
6109 ->add(19) + @hereFn{c-lineup-cascaded-calls}
6110 offset; @hereFn{c-lineup-cascaded-calls@r{ (inactive)}}
6111 @end group
6112 @end example
6113
6114 In any other situation @code{nil} is returned to allow use in list
6115 expressions.
6116
6117 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6118 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6119 @end defun
6120
6121 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6122
6123 @defun c-lineup-streamop
6124 @findex lineup-streamop (c-)
6125 Line up C++ stream operators (i.e., @samp{<<} and @samp{>>}).
6126
6127 @workswith @code{stream-op}.
6128 @end defun
6129
6130 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6131
6132 @defun c-lineup-string-cont
6133 @findex lineup-string-cont (c-)
6134 Line up a continued string under the one it continues. A continued
6135 string in this sense is where a string literal follows directly after
6136 another one. E.g:
6137
6138 @example
6139 @group
6140 result = prefix + "A message "
6141 "string."; @hereFn{c-lineup-string-cont}
6142 @end group
6143 @end example
6144
6145 @code{nil} is returned in other situations, to allow stacking with other
6146 lineup functions.
6147
6148 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6149 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6150 @end defun
6151
6152
6153 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6154 @node Comment Line-Up, Misc Line-Up, Operator Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
6155 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6156 @subsection Comment Line-Up Functions
6157 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6158
6159 The lineup functions here calculate the indentation for several types
6160 of comment structure.
6161
6162 @defun c-lineup-C-comments
6163 @findex lineup-C-comments (c-)
6164 Line up C block comment continuation lines. Various heuristics are used
6165 to handle most of the common comment styles. Some examples:
6166
6167 @example
6168 @group
6169 /* /** /*
6170 * text * text text
6171 */ */ */
6172 @end group
6173 @end example
6174
6175 @example
6176 @group
6177 /* text /* /**
6178 text ** text ** text
6179 */ */ */
6180 @end group
6181 @end example
6182
6183 @example
6184 @group
6185 /**************************************************
6186 * text
6187 *************************************************/
6188 @end group
6189 @end example
6190
6191 @vindex comment-start-skip
6192 @example
6193 @group
6194 /**************************************************
6195 Free form text comments:
6196 In comments with a long delimiter line at the
6197 start, the indentation is kept unchanged for lines
6198 that start with an empty comment line prefix. The
6199 delimiter line is whatever matches the
6200 @code{comment-start-skip} regexp.
6201 **************************************************/
6202 @end group
6203 @end example
6204
6205 The style variable @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} is used to recognize
6206 the comment line prefix, e.g., the @samp{*} that usually starts every
6207 line inside a comment.
6208
6209 @workswith The @code{c} syntactic symbol.
6210 @end defun
6211
6212 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6213
6214 @defun c-lineup-comment
6215 @findex lineup-comment (c-)
6216 Line up a comment-only line according to the style variable
6217 @code{c-comment-only-line-offset}. If the comment is lined up with a
6218 comment starter on the previous line, that alignment is preserved.
6219
6220 @defopt c-comment-only-line-offset
6221 @vindex comment-only-line-offset (c-)
6222 This style variable specifies the extra offset for the line. It can
6223 contain an integer or a cons cell of the form
6224
6225 @example
6226 (@r{@var{non-anchored-offset}} . @r{@var{anchored-offset}})
6227 @end example
6228
6229 @noindent
6230 where @var{non-anchored-offset} is the amount of offset given to
6231 non-column-zero anchored lines, and @var{anchored-offset} is the amount
6232 of offset to give column-zero anchored lines. Just an integer as value
6233 is equivalent to @code{(@r{@var{value}} . -1000)}.
6234 @end defopt
6235
6236 @workswith @code{comment-intro}.
6237 @end defun
6238
6239 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6240
6241 @defun c-lineup-knr-region-comment
6242 @findex lineup-knr-region-comment (c-)
6243 Line up a comment in the ``K&R region'' with the declaration. That is
6244 the region between the function or class header and the beginning of the
6245 block. E.g:
6246
6247 @example
6248 @group
6249 int main()
6250 /* Called at startup. */ @hereFn{c-lineup-knr-region-comment}
6251 @{
6252 return 0;
6253 @}
6254 @end group
6255 @end example
6256
6257 Return @code{nil} if called in any other situation, to be useful in list
6258 expressions.
6259
6260 @workswith @code{comment-intro}.
6261 @end defun
6262
6263 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6264 @node Misc Line-Up, , Comment Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
6265 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6266 @subsection Miscellaneous Line-Up Functions
6267 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6268
6269 The line-up functions here are the odds and ends which didn't fit into
6270 any earlier category.
6271
6272 @defun c-lineup-dont-change
6273 @findex lineup-dont-change (c-)
6274 This lineup function makes the line stay at whatever indentation it
6275 already has; think of it as an identity function for lineups.
6276
6277 @workswith Any syntactic symbol.
6278 @end defun
6279
6280 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6281
6282 @defun c-lineup-cpp-define
6283 @findex lineup-cpp-define (c-)
6284 Line up macro continuation lines according to the indentation of the
6285 construct preceding the macro. E.g:
6286
6287 @example
6288 @group
6289 const char msg[] = @hereFn{@r{The beginning of the preceding construct.}}
6290 \"Some text.\";
6291
6292 #define X(A, B) \
6293 do @{ \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6294 printf (A, B); \
6295 @} while (0)
6296 @end group
6297 @end example
6298
6299 @noindent
6300 and:
6301
6302 @example
6303 @group
6304 int dribble() @{
6305 if (!running) @hereFn{@r{The beginning of the preceding construct.}}
6306 error(\"Not running!\");
6307
6308 #define X(A, B) \
6309 do @{ \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6310 printf (A, B); \
6311 @} while (0)
6312 @end group
6313 @end example
6314
6315 If @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is non-@code{nil}, the
6316 function returns the relative indentation to the macro start line to
6317 allow accumulation with other offsets. E.g., in the following cases,
6318 @code{cpp-define-intro} is combined with the
6319 @code{statement-block-intro} that comes from the @samp{do @{} that hangs
6320 on the @samp{#define} line:
6321
6322 @example
6323 @group
6324 const char msg[] =
6325 \"Some text.\";
6326
6327 #define X(A, B) do @{ \
6328 printf (A, B); \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6329 this->refs++; \
6330 @} while (0) @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6331 @end group
6332 @end example
6333
6334 @noindent
6335 and:
6336
6337 @example
6338 @group
6339 int dribble() @{
6340 if (!running)
6341 error(\"Not running!\");
6342
6343 #define X(A, B) do @{ \
6344 printf (A, B); \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6345 this->refs++; \
6346 @} while (0) @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6347 @end group
6348 @end example
6349
6350 The relative indentation returned by @code{c-lineup-cpp-define} is zero
6351 and two, respectively, on the two lines in each of these examples. They
6352 are then added to the two column indentation that
6353 @code{statement-block-intro} gives in both cases here.
6354
6355 If the relative indentation is zero, then @code{nil} is returned
6356 instead. That is useful in a list expression to specify the default
6357 indentation on the top level.
6358
6359 If @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is @code{nil} then this
6360 function keeps the current indentation, except for empty lines (ignoring
6361 the ending backslash) where it takes the indentation from the closest
6362 preceding nonempty line in the macro. If there's no such line in the
6363 macro then the indentation is taken from the construct preceding it, as
6364 described above.
6365
6366 @workswith @code{cpp-define-intro}.
6367 @end defun
6368
6369 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6370
6371 @defun c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg
6372 @findex lineup-gcc-asm-reg (c-)
6373 Line up a gcc asm register under one on a previous line.
6374
6375 @example
6376 @group
6377 asm ("foo %1, %0\n"
6378 "bar %0, %1"
6379 : "=r" (w),
6380 "=r" (x)
6381 : "0" (y),
6382 "1" (z));
6383 @end group
6384 @end example
6385
6386 The @samp{x} line is aligned to the text after the @samp{:} on the
6387 @samp{w} line, and similarly @samp{z} under @samp{y}.
6388
6389 This is done only in an @samp{asm} or @samp{__asm__} block, and only to
6390 those lines mentioned. Anywhere else @code{nil} is returned. The usual
6391 arrangement is to have this routine as an extra feature at the start of
6392 arglist lineups, e.g.:
6393
6394 @example
6395 (c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg c-lineup-arglist)
6396 @end example
6397
6398 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6399 @end defun
6400
6401 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6402
6403 @defun c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont
6404 @findex lineup-topmost-intro-cont (c-)
6405 Line up declaration continuation lines zero or one indentation
6406 step@footnote{This function is mainly provided to mimic the behavior of
6407 CC Mode 5.28 and earlier where this case wasn't handled consistently so
6408 that those lines could be analyzed as either topmost-intro-cont or
6409 statement-cont. It's used for @code{topmost-intro-cont} by default, but
6410 you might consider using @code{+} instead.}. For lines preceding a
6411 definition, zero is used. For other lines, @code{c-basic-offset} is
6412 added to the indentation. E.g:
6413
6414 @example
6415 @group
6416 int
6417 neg (int i) @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6418 @{
6419 return -i;
6420 @}
6421 @end group
6422 @end example
6423
6424 @noindent
6425 and
6426
6427 @example
6428 @group
6429 struct
6430 larch @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6431 @{
6432 double height;
6433 @}
6434 the_larch, @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6435 another_larch; @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6436 @sssTBasicOffset{}
6437 @end group
6438 @end example
6439
6440 @noindent
6441 and
6442
6443 @example
6444 @group
6445 struct larch
6446 the_larch, @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6447 another_larch; @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6448 @end group
6449 @end example
6450
6451 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}.
6452 @end defun
6453
6454 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6455 @node Custom Line-Up, Other Indentation, Line-Up Functions, Customizing Indentation
6456 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6457 @section Custom Line-Up Functions
6458 @cindex customization, indentation functions
6459 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6460
6461 The most flexible way to customize indentation is by writing custom
6462 line-up functions, and associating them with specific syntactic
6463 symbols (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}). Depending on the effect you want,
6464 it might be better to write a @code{c-special-indent-hook} function
6465 rather than a line-up function (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
6466
6467 @ccmode{} comes with an extensive set of predefined line-up functions,
6468 not all of which are used by the default styles. So there's a good
6469 chance the function you want already exists. @xref{Line-Up
6470 Functions}, for a list of them. If you write your own line-up
6471 function, it's probably a good idea to start working from one of these
6472 predefined functions, which can be found in the file
6473 @file{cc-align.el}. If you have written a line-up function that you
6474 think is generally useful, you're very welcome to contribute it;
6475 please contact @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}.
6476
6477 Line-up functions are passed a single argument, the syntactic
6478 element (see below). The return value is a @code{c-offsets-alist}
6479 offset specification: for example, an integer, a symbol such as
6480 @code{+}, a vector, @code{nil}@footnote{Returning @code{nil} is useful
6481 when the offset specification for a syntactic element is a list
6482 containing the line-up function (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}).}, or even
6483 another line-up function. Full details of these are in
6484 @ref{c-offsets-alist}.
6485
6486 Line-up functions must not move point or change the content of the
6487 buffer (except temporarily). They are however allowed to do
6488 @dfn{hidden buffer changes}, i.e., setting text properties for caching
6489 purposes etc. Buffer undo recording is disabled while they run.
6490
6491 The syntactic element passed as the parameter to a line-up function is
6492 a cons cell of the form
6493
6494 @example
6495 (@r{@var{syntactic-symbol}} . @r{@var{anchor-position}})
6496 @end example
6497
6498 @noindent
6499 @c FIXME!!! The following sentence might be better omitted, since the
6500 @c information is in the cross reference "Syntactic Analysis". 2005/10/2.
6501 where @var{syntactic-symbol} is the symbol that the function was
6502 called for, and @var{anchor-position} is the anchor position (if any)
6503 for the construct that triggered the syntactic symbol
6504 (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}). This cons cell is how the syntactic
6505 element of a line used to be represented in @ccmode{} 5.28 and
6506 earlier. Line-up functions are still passed this cons cell, so as to
6507 preserve compatibility with older configurations. In the future, we
6508 may decide to convert to using the full list format---you can prepare
6509 your setup for this by using the access functions
6510 (@code{c-langelem-sym}, etc.) described below.
6511
6512 @vindex c-syntactic-element
6513 @vindex syntactic-element (c-)
6514 @vindex c-syntactic-context
6515 @vindex syntactic-context (c-)
6516 Some syntactic symbols, e.g., @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, have more
6517 info in the syntactic element: typically other positions that can be
6518 interesting besides the anchor position. That info can't be accessed
6519 through the passed argument, which is a cons cell. Instead, you can
6520 get this information from the variable @code{c-syntactic-element},
6521 which is dynamically bound to the complete syntactic element. The
6522 variable @code{c-syntactic-context} might also be useful: it gets
6523 dynamically bound to the complete syntactic context. @xref{Custom
6524 Braces}.
6525
6526 @ccmode{} provides a few functions to access parts of syntactic
6527 elements in a more abstract way. Besides making the code easier to
6528 read, they also hide the difference between the old cons cell form
6529 used in the line-up function argument and the new list form used in
6530 @code{c-syntactic-element} and everywhere else. The functions are:
6531
6532 @defun c-langelem-sym langelem
6533 @findex langelem-sym (c-)
6534 Return the syntactic symbol in @var{langelem}.
6535 @end defun
6536
6537 @defun c-langelem-pos langelem
6538 @findex langelem-pos (c-)
6539 Return the anchor position in @var{langelem}, or nil if there is none.
6540 @end defun
6541
6542 @defun c-langelem-col langelem &optional preserve-point
6543 @findex langelem-col (c-)
6544 Return the column of the anchor position in @var{langelem}. Also move
6545 the point to that position unless @var{preserve-point} is
6546 non-@code{nil}.
6547 @end defun
6548
6549 @defun c-langelem-2nd-pos langelem
6550 @findex langelem-2nd-pos (c-)
6551 Return the secondary position in @var{langelem}, or @code{nil} if there
6552 is none.
6553
6554 Note that the return value of this function is always @code{nil} if
6555 @var{langelem} is in the old cons cell form. Thus this function is
6556 only meaningful when used on syntactic elements taken from
6557 @code{c-syntactic-element} or @code{c-syntactic-context}.
6558 @end defun
6559
6560 Custom line-up functions can be as simple or as complex as you like, and
6561 any syntactic symbol that appears in @code{c-offsets-alist} can have a
6562 custom line-up function associated with it.
6563
6564 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6565 @node Other Indentation, , Custom Line-Up, Customizing Indentation
6566 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6567 @section Other Special Indentations
6568 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6569
6570 To configure macros which you invoke without a terminating @samp{;},
6571 see @xref{Macros with ;}.
6572
6573 Here are the remaining odds and ends regarding indentation:
6574
6575 @defopt c-label-minimum-indentation
6576 @vindex label-minimum-indentation (c-)
6577 In @samp{gnu} style (@pxref{Built-in Styles}), a minimum indentation is
6578 imposed on lines inside code blocks. This minimum indentation is
6579 controlled by this style variable. The default value is 1.
6580
6581 @findex c-gnu-impose-minimum
6582 @findex gnu-impose-minimum (c-)
6583 It's the function @code{c-gnu-impose-minimum} that enforces this minimum
6584 indentation. It must be present on @code{c-special-indent-hook} to
6585 work.
6586 @end defopt
6587
6588 @defopt c-special-indent-hook
6589 @vindex special-indent-hook (c-)
6590 This style variable is a standard hook variable that is called after
6591 every line is indented by @ccmode{}. It is called only if
6592 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} is non-@code{nil} (which it is by
6593 default (@pxref{Indentation Engine Basics})). You can put a function
6594 on this hook to do any special indentation or ad hoc line adjustments
6595 your style dictates, such as adding extra indentation to constructors
6596 or destructor declarations in a class definition, etc. Sometimes it
6597 is better to write a custom Line-up Function instead (@pxref{Custom
6598 Line-Up}).
6599
6600 When the indentation engine calls this hook, the variable
6601 @code{c-syntactic-context} is bound to the current syntactic context
6602 (i.e., what you would get by typing @kbd{C-c C-s} on the source line.
6603 @xref{Custom Braces}.). Note that you should not change point or mark
6604 inside a @code{c-special-indent-hook} function, i.e., you'll probably
6605 want to wrap your function in a @code{save-excursion}@footnote{The
6606 numerical value returned by @code{point} will change if you change the
6607 indentation of the line within a @code{save-excursion} form, but point
6608 itself will still be over the same piece of text.}.
6609
6610 Setting @code{c-special-indent-hook} in style definitions is handled
6611 slightly differently from other variables---A style can only add
6612 functions to this hook, not remove them. @xref{Style Variables}.
6613 @end defopt
6614
6615
6616 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6617 @node Custom Macros, Odds and Ends, Customizing Indentation, Top
6618 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6619 @chapter Customizing Macros
6620 @cindex macros
6621 @cindex preprocessor directives
6622 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6623
6624 Preprocessor macros in C, C++, and Objective C (introduced by
6625 @code{#define}) have a syntax different from the main language---for
6626 example, a macro declaration is not terminated by a semicolon, and if
6627 it is more than a line long, line breaks in it must be escaped with
6628 backslashes. @ccmode{} has some commands to manipulate these, see
6629 @ref{Macro Backslashes}.
6630
6631 Normally, the lines in a multi-line macro are indented relative to
6632 each other as though they were code. You can suppress this behavior
6633 by setting the following user option:
6634
6635 @defopt c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros
6636 @vindex syntactic-indentation-in-macros (c-)
6637 Enable syntactic analysis inside macros, which is the default. If this
6638 is @code{nil}, all lines inside macro definitions are analyzed as
6639 @code{cpp-macro-cont}.
6640 @end defopt
6641
6642 Because a macro can expand into anything at all, near where one is
6643 invoked @ccmode{} can only indent and fontify code heuristically.
6644 Sometimes it gets it wrong. Usually you should try to design your
6645 macros so that they ''look like ordinary code'' when you invoke them.
6646 However, one situation is so common that @ccmode{} handles it
6647 specially: that is when certain macros needn't (or mustn't) be
6648 followed by a @samp{;}. You need to configure @ccmode{} to handle
6649 these macros properly, see @ref{Macros with ;}.
6650
6651 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6652 @menu
6653 * Macro Backslashes::
6654 * Macros with ;::
6655 @end menu
6656
6657 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6658 @node Macro Backslashes, Macros with ;, Custom Macros, Custom Macros
6659 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6660 @section Customizing Macro Backslashes
6661 @cindex @code{#define}
6662 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6663
6664 @ccmode{} provides some tools to help keep the line continuation
6665 backslashes in macros neat and tidy. Their precise action is
6666 customized with these variables:
6667
6668 @defopt c-backslash-column
6669 @vindex backslash-column (c-)
6670 @defoptx c-backslash-max-column
6671 @vindex backslash-max-column (c-)
6672 These variables control the alignment columns for line continuation
6673 backslashes in multiline macros. They are used by the functions that
6674 automatically insert or align such backslashes,
6675 e.g., @code{c-backslash-region} and @code{c-context-line-break}.
6676
6677 @code{c-backslash-column} specifies the minimum column for the
6678 backslashes. If any line in the macro goes past this column, then the
6679 next tab stop (i.e., next multiple of @code{tab-width}) in that line is
6680 used as the alignment column for all the backslashes, so that they
6681 remain in a single column. However, if any lines go past
6682 @code{c-backslash-max-column} then the backslashes in the rest of the
6683 macro will be kept at that column, so that the lines which are too
6684 long ``stick out'' instead.
6685
6686 Don't ever set these variables to @code{nil}. If you want to disable
6687 the automatic alignment of backslashes, use
6688 @code{c-auto-align-backslashes}.
6689 @end defopt
6690
6691 @defopt c-auto-align-backslashes
6692 @vindex auto-align-backslashes (c-)
6693 Align automatically inserted line continuation backslashes if
6694 non-@code{nil}. When line continuation backslashes are inserted
6695 automatically for line breaks in multiline macros, e.g., by
6696 @code{c-context-line-break}, they are aligned with the other
6697 backslashes in the same macro if this flag is set.
6698
6699 If @code{c-auto-align-backslashes} is @code{nil}, automatically
6700 inserted backslashes are preceded by a single space, and backslashes
6701 get aligned only when you explicitly invoke the command
6702 @code{c-backslash-region} (@kbd{C-c C-\}).
6703 @end defopt
6704
6705 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6706 @node Macros with ;, , Macro Backslashes, Custom Macros
6707 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6708 @section Macros with semicolons
6709 @cindex macros with semicolons
6710 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6711 Macros which needn't (or mustn't) be followed by a semicolon when you
6712 invoke them, @dfn{macros with semicolons}, are very common. These can
6713 cause @ccmode{} to parse the next line wrongly as a
6714 @code{statement-cont} (@pxref{Function Symbols}) and thus mis-indent
6715 it.
6716
6717 You can prevent this by specifying which macros have semicolons. It
6718 doesn't matter whether or not such a macro has a parameter list:
6719
6720 @defopt c-macro-names-with-semicolon
6721 @vindex macro-names-with-semicolon (c-)
6722 This buffer-local variable specifies which macros have semicolons.
6723 After setting its value, you need to call
6724 @code{c-make-macro-with-semi-re} for it to take effect. It should be
6725 set to one of these values:
6726
6727 @table @asis
6728 @item nil
6729 There are no macros with semicolons.
6730 @item a list of strings
6731 Each string is the name of a macro with a semicolon. Only valid
6732 @code{#define} names are allowed here. For example, to set the
6733 default value, you could write the following into your @file{.emacs}:
6734
6735 @example
6736 (setq c-macro-names-with-semicolon
6737 '("Q_OBJECT" "Q_PROPERTY" "Q_DECLARE" "Q_ENUMS"))
6738 @end example
6739
6740 @item a regular expression
6741 This matches each symbol which is a macro with a semicolon. It must
6742 not match any string which isn't a valid @code{#define} name. For
6743 example:
6744
6745 @example
6746 (setq c-macro-names-with-semicolon
6747 "\\<\\(CLEAN_UP_AND_RETURN\\|Q_[[:upper:]]+\\)\\>")
6748 @end example
6749 @end table
6750 @end defopt
6751
6752 @defun c-make-macro-with-semi-re
6753 @findex make-macro-with-semi-re (c-)
6754 Call this (non-interactive) function, which sets internal variables,
6755 each time you change the value of
6756 @code{c-macro-names-with-semicolon}. It takes no arguments, and its
6757 return value has no meaning. This function is called by @ccmode{}'s
6758 initialization code.
6759 @end defun
6760
6761 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6762 @node Odds and Ends, Sample .emacs File, Custom Macros, Top
6763 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6764 @chapter Odds and Ends
6765 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6766
6767 The stuff that didn't fit in anywhere else is documented here.
6768
6769 @defopt c-require-final-newline
6770 @vindex require-final-newline (c-)
6771 Controls whether a final newline is enforced when the file is saved.
6772 The value is an association list that for each language mode specifies
6773 the value to give to @code{require-final-newline} (@pxref{Saving
6774 Buffers,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}) at mode initialization. If a
6775 language isn't present on the association list, CC Mode won't touch
6776 @code{require-final-newline} in buffers for that language.
6777
6778 The default is to set @code{require-final-newline} to @code{t} in the
6779 languages that mandate that source files should end with newlines.
6780 These are C, C++ and Objective-C.
6781 @end defopt
6782
6783 @defopt c-echo-syntactic-information-p
6784 @vindex echo-syntactic-information-p (c-)
6785 If non-@code{nil}, the syntactic analysis for the current line is shown
6786 in the echo area when it's indented (unless
6787 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} is @code{nil}). That's useful when
6788 finding out which syntactic symbols to modify to get the indentation you
6789 want.
6790 @end defopt
6791
6792 @defopt c-report-syntactic-errors
6793 @vindex report-syntactic-errors (c-)
6794 If non-@code{nil}, certain syntactic errors are reported with a ding and
6795 a message, for example when an @code{else} is indented for which there
6796 is no corresponding @code{if}.
6797
6798 Note however that @ccmode{} doesn't make any special effort to check for
6799 syntactic errors; that's the job of the compiler. The reason it can
6800 report cases like the one above is that it can't find the correct
6801 anchoring position to indent the line in that case.
6802 @end defopt
6803
6804
6805 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6806 @node Sample .emacs File, Performance Issues, Odds and Ends, Top
6807 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6808 @appendix Sample .emacs File
6809 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6810
6811 Here's a sample .emacs file fragment that might help you along the way.
6812 Just copy this region and paste it into your .emacs file. You might want
6813 to change some of the actual values.
6814
6815 @verbatim
6816 ;; Make a non-standard key binding. We can put this in
6817 ;; c-mode-base-map because c-mode-map, c++-mode-map, and so on,
6818 ;; inherit from it.
6819 (defun my-c-initialization-hook ()
6820 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break))
6821 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-c-initialization-hook)
6822
6823 ;; offset customizations not in my-c-style
6824 ;; This will take precedence over any setting of the syntactic symbol
6825 ;; made by a style.
6826 (setq c-offsets-alist '((member-init-intro . ++)))
6827
6828 ;; Create my personal style.
6829 (defconst my-c-style
6830 '((c-tab-always-indent . t)
6831 (c-comment-only-line-offset . 4)
6832 (c-hanging-braces-alist . ((substatement-open after)
6833 (brace-list-open)))
6834 (c-hanging-colons-alist . ((member-init-intro before)
6835 (inher-intro)
6836 (case-label after)
6837 (label after)
6838 (access-label after)))
6839 (c-cleanup-list . (scope-operator
6840 empty-defun-braces
6841 defun-close-semi))
6842 (c-offsets-alist . ((arglist-close . c-lineup-arglist)
6843 (substatement-open . 0)
6844 (case-label . 4)
6845 (block-open . 0)
6846 (knr-argdecl-intro . -)))
6847 (c-echo-syntactic-information-p . t))
6848 "My C Programming Style")
6849 (c-add-style "PERSONAL" my-c-style)
6850
6851 ;; Customizations for all modes in CC Mode.
6852 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
6853 ;; set my personal style for the current buffer
6854 (c-set-style "PERSONAL")
6855 ;; other customizations
6856 (setq tab-width 8
6857 ;; this will make sure spaces are used instead of tabs
6858 indent-tabs-mode nil)
6859 ;; we like auto-newline, but not hungry-delete
6860 (c-toggle-auto-newline 1))
6861 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
6862 @end verbatim
6863
6864 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6865 @node Performance Issues, Limitations and Known Bugs, Sample .emacs File, Top
6866 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6867 @chapter Performance Issues
6868 @cindex performance
6869 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6870
6871 @comment FIXME: (ACM, 2003/5/24). Check whether AWK needs mentioning here.
6872
6873 C and its derivative languages are highly complex creatures. Often,
6874 ambiguous code situations arise that require @ccmode{} to scan large
6875 portions of the buffer to determine syntactic context. Such
6876 pathological code can cause @ccmode{} to perform fairly badly. This
6877 section gives some insight in how @ccmode{} operates, how that interacts
6878 with some coding styles, and what you can use to improve performance.
6879
6880 The overall goal is that @ccmode{} shouldn't be overly slow (i.e., take
6881 more than a fraction of a second) in any interactive operation.
6882 I.e., it's tuned to limit the maximum response time in single operations,
6883 which is sometimes at the expense of batch-like operations like
6884 reindenting whole blocks. If you find that @ccmode{} gradually gets
6885 slower and slower in certain situations, perhaps as the file grows in
6886 size or as the macro or comment you're editing gets bigger, then chances
6887 are that something isn't working right. You should consider reporting
6888 it, unless it's something that's mentioned in this section.
6889
6890 Because @ccmode{} has to scan the buffer backwards from the current
6891 insertion point, and because C's syntax is fairly difficult to parse in
6892 the backwards direction, @ccmode{} often tries to find the nearest
6893 position higher up in the buffer from which to begin a forward scan
6894 (it's typically an opening or closing parenthesis of some kind). The
6895 farther this position is from the current insertion point, the slower it
6896 gets.
6897
6898 @findex beginning-of-defun
6899 In earlier versions of @ccmode{}, we used to recommend putting the
6900 opening brace of a top-level construct@footnote{E.g., a function in C,
6901 or outermost class definition in C++ or Java.} into the leftmost
6902 column. Earlier still, this used to be a rigid Emacs constraint, as
6903 embodied in the @code{beginning-of-defun} function. @ccmode now
6904 caches syntactic information much better, so that the delay caused by
6905 searching for such a brace when it's not in column 0 is minimal,
6906 except perhaps when you've just moved a long way inside the file.
6907
6908 @findex defun-prompt-regexp
6909 @vindex c-Java-defun-prompt-regexp
6910 @vindex Java-defun-prompt-regexp (c-)
6911 A special note about @code{defun-prompt-regexp} in Java mode: The common
6912 style is to hang the opening braces of functions and classes on the
6913 right side of the line, and that doesn't work well with the Emacs
6914 approach. @ccmode{} comes with a constant
6915 @code{c-Java-defun-prompt-regexp} which tries to define a regular
6916 expression usable for this style, but there are problems with it. In
6917 some cases it can cause @code{beginning-of-defun} to hang@footnote{This
6918 has been observed in Emacs 19.34 and XEmacs 19.15.}. For this reason,
6919 it is not used by default, but if you feel adventurous, you can set
6920 @code{defun-prompt-regexp} to it in your mode hook. In any event,
6921 setting and relying on @code{defun-prompt-regexp} will definitely slow
6922 things down because (X)Emacs will be doing regular expression searches a
6923 lot, so you'll probably be taking a hit either way!
6924
6925 @ccmode{} maintains a cache of the opening parentheses of the blocks
6926 surrounding the point, and it adapts that cache as the point is moved
6927 around. That means that in bad cases it can take noticeable time to
6928 indent a line in a new surrounding, but after that it gets fast as long
6929 as the point isn't moved far off. The farther the point is moved, the
6930 less useful is the cache. Since editing typically is done in ``chunks''
6931 rather than on single lines far apart from each other, the cache
6932 typically gives good performance even when the code doesn't fit the
6933 Emacs approach to finding the defun starts.
6934
6935 @vindex c-enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p
6936 @vindex enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p (c-)
6937 XEmacs users can set the variable
6938 @code{c-enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p} to non-@code{nil}. This
6939 tells @ccmode{} to use XEmacs-specific built-in functions which, in some
6940 circumstances, can locate the top-most opening brace much more quickly than
6941 @code{beginning-of-defun}. Preliminary testing has shown that for
6942 styles where these braces are hung (e.g., most JDK-derived Java styles),
6943 this hack can improve performance of the core syntax parsing routines
6944 from 3 to 60 times. However, for styles which @emph{do} conform to
6945 Emacs's recommended style of putting top-level braces in column zero,
6946 this hack can degrade performance by about as much. Thus this variable
6947 is set to @code{nil} by default, since the Emacs-friendly styles should
6948 be more common (and encouraged!). Note that this variable has no effect
6949 in Emacs since the necessary built-in functions don't exist (in Emacs
6950 22.1 as of this writing in February 2007).
6951
6952 Text properties are used to speed up skipping over syntactic whitespace,
6953 i.e., comments and preprocessor directives. Indenting a line after a
6954 huge macro definition can be slow the first time, but after that the
6955 text properties are in place and it should be fast (even after you've
6956 edited other parts of the file and then moved back).
6957
6958 Font locking can be a CPU hog, especially the font locking done on
6959 decoration level 3 which tries to be very accurate. Note that that
6960 level is designed to be used with a font lock support mode that only
6961 fontifies the text that's actually shown, i.e., Lazy Lock or Just-in-time
6962 Lock mode, so make sure you use one of them. Fontification of a whole
6963 buffer with some thousand lines can often take over a minute. That is
6964 a known weakness; the idea is that it never should happen.
6965
6966 The most effective way to speed up font locking is to reduce the
6967 decoration level to 2 by setting @code{font-lock-maximum-decoration}
6968 appropriately. That level is designed to be as pretty as possible
6969 without sacrificing performance. @xref{Font Locking Preliminaries}, for
6970 more info.
6971
6972
6973 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6974 @node Limitations and Known Bugs, FAQ, Performance Issues, Top
6975 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6976 @chapter Limitations and Known Bugs
6977 @cindex limitations
6978 @cindex bugs
6979 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6980
6981 @itemize @bullet
6982 @item
6983 @ccmode{} doesn't support trigraphs. (These are character sequences
6984 such as @samp{??(}, which represents @samp{[}. They date from a time
6985 when some character sets didn't have all the characters that C needs,
6986 and are now utterly obsolete.)
6987
6988 @item
6989 There is no way to apply auto newline settings (@pxref{Auto-newlines})
6990 on already typed lines. That's only a feature to ease interactive
6991 editing.
6992
6993 To generalize this issue a bit: @ccmode{} is not intended to be used as
6994 a reformatter for old code in some more or less batch-like way. With
6995 the exception of some functions like @code{c-indent-region}, it's only
6996 geared to be used interactively to edit new code. There's currently no
6997 intention to change this goal.
6998
6999 If you want to reformat old code, you're probably better off using some
7000 other tool instead, e.g., @ref{Top, , GNU indent, indent, The `indent'
7001 Manual}, which has more powerful reformatting capabilities than
7002 @ccmode{}.
7003
7004 @item
7005 The support for C++ templates (in angle brackets) is not yet complete.
7006 When a non-nested template is used in a declaration, @ccmode{} indents
7007 it and font-locks it OK@. Templates used in expressions, and nested
7008 templates do not fare so well. Sometimes a workaround is to refontify
7009 the expression after typing the closing @samp{>}.
7010
7011 @item
7012 In a @dfn{k&r region} (the part of an old-fashioned C function
7013 declaration which specifies the types of its parameters, coming
7014 between the parameter list and the opening brace), there should be at
7015 most 20 top-level parenthesis and bracket pairs. This limit has been
7016 imposed for performance reasons. If it is violated, the source file
7017 might be incorrectly indented or fontified.
7018
7019 @item
7020 On loading @ccmode{}, sometimes this error message appears:
7021
7022 @example
7023 File mode specification error: (void-variable c-font-lock-keywords-3)
7024 @end example
7025
7026 This is due to a bug in the function @code{eval-after-load} in some
7027 versions of (X)Emacs. It can manifest itself when there is a symbolic
7028 link in the path of the directory which contains (X)Emacs. As a
7029 workaround, put the following into your @file{.emacs} file, fairly
7030 early on:
7031
7032 @example
7033 (defun my-load-cc-fonts ()
7034 (require "cc-fonts"))
7035 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-load-cc-fonts)
7036 @end example
7037 @end itemize
7038
7039 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7040 @node FAQ, Updating CC Mode, Limitations and Known Bugs, Top
7041 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7042 @appendix Frequently Asked Questions
7043 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7044
7045 @itemize @bullet
7046 @item
7047 @emph{How can I change the indent level from 4 spaces to 2 spaces?}
7048
7049 Set the variable @code{c-basic-offset}. @xref{Getting Started}.
7050
7051 @item
7052 @kindex RET
7053 @kindex C-j
7054 @emph{Why doesn't the @kbd{RET} key indent the new line?}
7055
7056 Emacs's convention is that @kbd{RET} just adds a newline, and that
7057 @kbd{C-j} adds a newline and indents it. You can make @kbd{RET} do this
7058 too by adding this to your @code{c-initialization-hook}:
7059
7060 @example
7061 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break)
7062 @end example
7063
7064 @xref{Getting Started}. This is a very common question. If you want
7065 this to be the default behavior, don't lobby us, lobby RMS@! @t{:-)}
7066
7067 @item
7068 @emph{How do I stop my code jumping all over the place when I type?}
7069
7070 Deactivate ``electric minor mode'' with @kbd{C-c C-l}. @xref{Getting
7071 Started}.
7072
7073 @item
7074 @kindex C-x h
7075 @kindex C-M-\
7076 @emph{How do I reindent the whole file?}
7077
7078 Visit the file and hit @kbd{C-x h} to mark the whole buffer. Then hit
7079 @kbd{C-M-\}. @xref{Indentation Commands}.
7080
7081 @item
7082 @kindex C-M-q
7083 @kindex C-M-u
7084 @emph{How do I reindent the current block?}
7085
7086 First move to the brace which opens the block with @kbd{C-M-u}, then
7087 reindent that expression with @kbd{C-M-q}. @xref{Indentation
7088 Commands}.
7089
7090 @item
7091 @emph{I put @code{(c-set-offset 'substatement-open 0)} in my
7092 @file{.emacs} file but I get an error saying that @code{c-set-offset}'s
7093 function definition is void. What's wrong?}
7094
7095 This means that @ccmode{} hasn't yet been loaded into your Emacs
7096 session by the time the @code{c-set-offset} call is reached, most
7097 likely because @ccmode{} is being autoloaded. Instead of putting the
7098 @code{c-set-offset} line in your top-level @file{.emacs} file, put it
7099 in your @code{c-initialization-hook} (@pxref{CC Hooks}), or simply
7100 modify @code{c-offsets-alist} directly:
7101
7102 @example
7103 (setq c-offsets-alist '((substatement-open . 0)))
7104 @end example
7105
7106 @item
7107 @cindex open paren in column zero
7108 @emph{I have an open paren character at column zero inside a comment or
7109 multiline string literal, and it causes the fontification and/or
7110 indentation to go haywire. What gives?}
7111
7112 It's due to the ad-hoc rule in (X)Emacs that such open parens always
7113 start defuns (which translates to functions, classes, namespaces or any
7114 other top-level block constructs in the @ccmode{} languages).
7115 @ifset XEMACS
7116 @xref{Defuns,,, xemacs, XEmacs User's Manual}, for details.
7117 @end ifset
7118 @ifclear XEMACS
7119 @xref{Left Margin Paren,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, for details
7120 (@xref{Defuns,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, in the Emacs 20 manual).
7121 @end ifclear
7122
7123 This heuristic is built into the core syntax analysis routines in
7124 (X)Emacs, so it's not really a @ccmode{} issue. However, in Emacs
7125 21.1 it became possible to turn it off@footnote{Using the variable
7126 @code{open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start}.} and @ccmode{} does so
7127 there since it's got its own system to keep track of blocks.
7128
7129 @end itemize
7130
7131
7132 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7133 @node Updating CC Mode, Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, FAQ, Top
7134 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7135 @appendix Getting the Latest CC Mode Release
7136 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7137
7138 @ccmode{} has been standard with all versions of Emacs since 19.34 and
7139 of XEmacs since 19.16.
7140
7141 @cindex web site
7142 Due to release schedule skew, it is likely that all of these Emacsen
7143 have old versions of @ccmode{} and so should be upgraded. Access to the
7144 @ccmode{} source code, as well as more detailed information on Emacsen
7145 compatibility, etc. are all available on the web site:
7146
7147 @quotation
7148 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/}
7149 @end quotation
7150
7151
7152 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7153 @node Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, GNU Free Documentation License, Updating CC Mode, Top
7154 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7155 @appendix Mailing Lists and Submitting Bug Reports
7156 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7157
7158 @kindex C-c C-b
7159 @findex c-submit-bug-report
7160 @findex submit-bug-report (c-)
7161 To report bugs, use the @kbd{C-c C-b} (bound to
7162 @code{c-submit-bug-report}) command. This provides vital information
7163 we need to reproduce your problem. Make sure you include a concise,
7164 but complete code example. Please try to boil your example down to
7165 just the essential code needed to reproduce the problem, and include
7166 an exact recipe of steps needed to expose the bug. Be especially sure
7167 to include any code that appears @emph{before} your bug example, if
7168 you think it might affect our ability to reproduce it.
7169
7170 Please try to produce the problem in an Emacs instance without any
7171 customizations loaded (i.e., start it with the @samp{-q --no-site-file}
7172 arguments). If it works correctly there, the problem might be caused
7173 by faulty customizations in either your own or your site
7174 configuration. In that case, we'd appreciate it if you isolate the
7175 Emacs Lisp code that triggers the bug and include it in your report.
7176
7177 @cindex bug report mailing list
7178 Bug reports should be sent to @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}. You can
7179 also send other questions and suggestions (kudos? @t{;-)} to that
7180 address. It's a mailing list which you can join or browse an archive
7181 of; see the web site at @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/} for
7182 further details.
7183
7184 @cindex announcement mailing list
7185 If you want to get announcements of new @ccmode{} releases, send the
7186 word @emph{subscribe} in the body of a message to
7187 @email{cc-mode-announce-request@@lists.sourceforge.net}. It's possible
7188 to subscribe from the web site too. Announcements will also be posted
7189 to the Usenet newsgroups @code{gnu.emacs.sources}, @code{comp.emacs},
7190 @code{comp.emacs.xemacs}, @code{comp.lang.c}, @code{comp.lang.c++},
7191 @code{comp.lang.objective-c}, @code{comp.lang.java.softwaretools},
7192 @code{comp.lang.idl}, and @code{comp.lang.awk}.
7193 @c There is no newsgroup for Pike. :-(
7194
7195
7196 @node GNU Free Documentation License, Command and Function Index, Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, Top
7197 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7198 @include doclicense.texi
7199
7200
7201 @c Removed the tentative node "Mode Initialization" from here, 2005/8/27.
7202 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7203 @node Command and Function Index, Variable Index, GNU Free Documentation License, Top
7204 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7205 @unnumbered Command and Function Index
7206 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7207
7208 Since most @ccmode{} commands are prepended with the string
7209 @samp{c-}, each appears under its @code{c-@var{thing}} name and its
7210 @code{@var{thing} (c-)} name.
7211 @iftex
7212 @sp 2
7213 @end iftex
7214 @printindex fn
7215
7216
7217 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7218 @node Variable Index, Concept and Key Index, Command and Function Index, Top
7219 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7220 @unnumbered Variable Index
7221 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7222
7223 Since most @ccmode{} variables are prepended with the string
7224 @samp{c-}, each appears under its @code{c-@var{thing}} name and its
7225 @code{@var{thing} (c-)} name.
7226 @iftex
7227 @sp 2
7228 @end iftex
7229 @printindex vr
7230
7231
7232 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7233 @node Concept and Key Index, , Variable Index, Top
7234 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7235 @unnumbered Concept and Key Index
7236 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7237
7238 @printindex cp
7239
7240
7241 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7242 @comment Epilogue.
7243 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7244
7245 @bye